advertisement
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
GI
MA
SECTION
AT
EM
LC
EC
FE
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX
....................................4
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................4
PRECAUTIONS
...............................................................6
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) ″ AIR BAG ″ and ″ SEAT BELT
......................................................6
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of A/T and Engine...........................................6
Precautions..................................................................6
Service Notice or Precautions.....................................8
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................9
PREPARATION
.............................................................10
Special Service Tools ................................................10
OVERALL SYSTEM
......................................................12
A/T Electrical Parts Location .....................................12
Circuit Diagram..........................................................13
Cross-sectional View .................................................14
Hydraulic Control Circuit............................................15
Shift Mechanism ........................................................16
Control System ..........................................................25
Control Mechanism....................................................26
Control Valve .............................................................31
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
...............................................................33
Introduction ................................................................33
OBD-II Function for A/T System................................33
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ..............33
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)....................33
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................37
CONSULT ..................................................................37
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT.................46
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
..................53
Introduction ................................................................53
Work Flow..................................................................57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
...........59
A/T Fluid Check .........................................................59
Stall Test ....................................................................59
Line Pressure Test.....................................................62
Road Test...................................................................63
C O N T E N T S
CL
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
DESCRIPTION
...............................................................81
Symptom Chart..........................................................81
TCM Terminals and Reference Value........................92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
..........96
Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN......................................96
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
.....99
Description.................................................................99
Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW...............................101
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................102
Component Inspection.............................................104
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CIRCUIT
.......................................................................105
Description...............................................................105
Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS......................................107
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................108
Component Inspection.............................................109
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T
(REVOLUTION SENSOR)
...........................................110
Description...............................................................110
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T................................112
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................113
Component Inspection.............................................114
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
.......................115
Description...............................................................115
Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................117
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................118
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR
POSITION
....................................................................120
Description...............................................................120
Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST ......................................123
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................124
Component Inspection.............................................125
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR
POSITION
....................................................................126
Description...............................................................126
Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND......................................129
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................130
Component Inspection.............................................131
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR
....................................................................132
Description...............................................................132
Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD......................................135
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................136
Component Inspection.............................................137
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR
....................................................................138
Description...............................................................138
Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH......................................142
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................143
Component Inspection.............................................147
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH
......................................................148
Description...............................................................148
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................150
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................151
Component Inspection.............................................152
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
......153
Description...............................................................153
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG ...............................156
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................157
Component Inspection.............................................161
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
...162
Description...............................................................162
Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................164
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................165
Component Inspection.............................................167
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
..................169
Description...............................................................169
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................171
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................172
Component Inspection.............................................173
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
..................174
Description...............................................................174
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................176
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................177
Component Inspection.............................................178
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
...........179
Description...............................................................179
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................182
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................183
Component Inspection.............................................187
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID
..........................................................................188
Description...............................................................188
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................190
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................191
Component Inspection.............................................192
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)
....193
Description...............................................................193
CONTENTS
(Cont’d)
Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................195
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................196
Component Inspection.............................................198
................................199
Description...............................................................199
Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................201
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................202
CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description...............................................................203
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................204
......................................205
Description...............................................................205
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................206
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
...............207
Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC .............................207
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On....210
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In ″ P ″ and ″ N ″
Position ....................................................................212
3. In ″ P ″ Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or
Backward When Pushed .........................................213
4. In ″ N ″ Position, Vehicle Moves ...........................214
″ N ″ -> ″ R ″ Position .......................216
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In ″ R ″
Position ....................................................................218
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In ″ D ″ , ″ 2 ″
Or ″ 1 ″ Position.........................................................221
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
...................224
Or Does Not 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
..................................................227
3
4
.............................230
.............................233
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up .........................236
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ..............238
14. Lock-up Is Not Released...................................240
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
4
3
).....................................................241
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D
3
.......................243
, When 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D
4
...............244
3
2
Lever ″ D ″ -> ″ 2 ″ Position.........................................245
Lever ″ 2 ″ -> ″ 1 ″ Position .........................................246
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine
Brake........................................................................247
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches
Circuit Checks) ........................................................247
.........................................255
Description...............................................................255
Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -........................................256
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................257
AT-2
Component Check...................................................259
..........................................260
Components.............................................................260
Removal...................................................................260
Installation................................................................261
..............................................262
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators.............262
Revolution Sensor Replacement.............................263
Rear Oil Seal Replacement.....................................263
Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal
Replacement............................................................263
Parking Components Inspection..............................264
Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment ................265
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment........................265
...............................266
Removal...................................................................266
Installation................................................................267
.................................................................270
Components.............................................................270
Oil Channel..............................................................273
............................................................275
.........................286
Oil Pump..................................................................286
Control Valve Assembly...........................................290
Control Valve Upper Body .......................................296
Control Valve Lower Body .......................................301
Reverse Clutch ........................................................303
CONTENTS
(Cont’d)
GI
High Clutch ..............................................................307
Forward and Overrun Clutches ...............................309
Low & Reverse Brake..............................................313
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly..............................317
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub..........319
Band Servo Piston Assembly ..................................322
Parking Pawl Components ......................................326
..................................................................328
Assembly (1)............................................................328
Adjustment...............................................................336
Assembly (2)............................................................338
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
.......345
General Specifications.............................................345
Shift Schedule..........................................................345
Stall Revolution........................................................345
Line Pressure...........................................................345
Return Springs.........................................................346
Accumulator O-ring..................................................347
Clutches and Brakes ...............................................347
Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch........................349
Total End Play..........................................................349
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ..............................350
Removal and Installation .........................................350
Shift Solenoid Valves...............................................350
Solenoid Valves .......................................................350
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor.................................350
Revolution Sensor ...................................................350
Dropping Resistor....................................................350
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
NAAT0179
ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC
NAAT0179S01
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
ENGINE SPEED SIG
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
PNP SW/CIRC
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3
Items
(CONSULT screen terms)
ECM*1
1107
1208
1207
1205
1103
1104
1105
1106
1203
1101
1108
DTC
CONSULT
GST*2
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0744
P0710
P0725
P0745
P1760
P0705
P0750
Reference page
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4
1201
1204
1206
1102
P0755
P0740
P1705
P0720
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time.
AT-4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC
=NAAT0179S02
DTC
CONSULT
GST*2
P0705
P0710
P0720
P0725
P0731
P0732
P0733
ECM*1
1101
1208
1102
1207
1103
1104
1105
Items
(CONSULT screen terms)
PNP SW/CIRC
ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4
ENGINE SPEED SIG
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
Reference page
P0734
P0740
P0744
P0745
1106
1204
1107
1205
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
P0750
P0755
P1705
P1760
1108
1201
1206
1203
SFT SOL A/CIRC*3
SFT SOL B/CIRC*3
TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3
O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at the same time.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-5
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER”
NAAT0001
The supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain types of collision. The SRS system composition which is available to NISSAN MODEL R50 is as follows:
I For a frontal collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of driver air bag module (located in the center of the steering wheel), front passenger air bag module (located on the instrument panel on passenger side), seat belt pre-tensioners, a diagnosis sensor unit, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
I For a side collision
The Supplemental Restraint System consists of side air bag module (located in the outer side of front seat), satellite sensor, diagnosis sensor unit (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision), wiring harness, warning lamp (one of components of air bags for a frontal collision).
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the
RS section
of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I
To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I
Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air
Bag Module, see the RS section.
I
Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. Spiral cable and wiring harnesses covered with yellow insulation tape either just before the harness connectors or for the complete harness are related to the SRS.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of A/T and Engine
NAAT0002
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I
Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I
Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease, dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I
Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
I
Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system, etc.
I
Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.
Precautions
NAAT0003
I
Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness connector, turn ignition switch “OFF” and disconnect negative battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if ignition switch is turned off.
SEF289H
AT-6
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
I
When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SEF291H
I
Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal inspection and make sure whether TCM functions prop-
erly or not. (See page AT-92.)
EC
FE
CL
MT
MEF040DA
I
After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform
“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed.
TF
PD
AX
SAT964I
SU
I
Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
I
Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
I
Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the operation of the transmission.
I
Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper assembly.
I
All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose, non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.
I
Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the transmission is disassembled.
I It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they are indicated.
I
The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disassembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from becoming scattered or lost.
I
Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along bores in valve body under their own weight.
AT-7
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
Precautions (Cont’d)
PRECAUTIONS
I
Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not use grease.
I
Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings, seals and gaskets when assembling.
I Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer. Refer to “ATF COOLER SERVICE”
I
After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
I
When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF cooling system.
Always follow the procedures when changing A/T fluid. Refer to MA-24, “Changing A/T Fluid”.
Service Notice or Precautions
NAAT0004
FAIL-SAFE
NAAT0004S01
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about
8 seconds. (For “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, refer to AT-46.)
Fail-Safe may occur without electrical circuit damage if the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions (such as excessive wheel spin followed by sudden braking). To recover normal shift pattern, turn the ignition key
“OFF” for 5 seconds, then “ON”.
The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “WORK FLOW” (Refer to AT-57).
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE
NAAT0004S04
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
I External leaks in the hub weld area.
I Converter hub is scored or damaged.
I Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.
I Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
I Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter.
I Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)
I Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.
I Internal failure of stator roller clutch.
I Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter).
I Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if:
I The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
AT-8
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions (Cont’d)
I The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
I Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
I Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such as taxi, delivery or police use.
ATF COOLER SERVICE
NAAT0004S02
Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer.
Replace radiator lower tank (which includes ATF cooler) with a new one and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air.
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS
NAAT0004S03
I A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on
AT-38 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
I The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM memories.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-35 to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL.
I The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
PNP switch
A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
*: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC-54, “Introduction”.
I
Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use the new style slidelocking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL-5, “Description”.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the following:
I GI-11, “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS”.
I EL-9, “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit.
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the following:
I GI-34, “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUP IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS”.
I GI-23, “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT”.
NAAT0005
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-9
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
Special Service Tools
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST2505S001
(J34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
( — )
Oil pressure gauge
(
2 ST25052000
—
Hose
3 ST25053000
( —
Joint pipe
)
)
(
4 ST25054000
Adapter
—
(
5 ST25055000
Adapter
— )
)
ST07870000
(J37068)
Transmission case stand
Description
NT097
Measuring line pressure
Disassembling and assembling A/T
a: 182 mm (7.17 in) b: 282 mm (11.10 in) c: 230 mm (9.06 in) d: 100 mm (3.94 in)
NT421
KV31102100
(J37065)
Torque converter oneway clutch check tool
Checking one-way clutch in torque converter
NAAT0006
NT098
ST25850000
(J25721-A)
Sliding hammer
Removing oil pump assembly
a: 179 mm (7.05 in) b: 70 mm (2.76 in) c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
d: M12 x 1.75P
KV31102400
(J34285 and J34285-87)
Clutch spring compressor
NT422
Removing and installing clutch return springs
a: 320 mm (12.60 in) b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
NT423
AT-10
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST33200000
(J26082)
Drift
Description
(J34291)
Shim setting gauge set
NT091
NT101
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)
GI
MA
Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing rear oil seal
a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
EM
LC
Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil pump thrust washer
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-11
A/T Electrical Parts Location
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location
NAAT0007
AT-12
SAT537J
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram
Circuit Diagram
NAAT0008
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT751A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-13
Cross-sectional View
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View
NAAT0010
AT-14
SAT125BA
OVERALL SYSTEM
Hydraulic Control Circuit
Hydraulic Control Circuit
NAAT0011
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT624GA
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-15
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism
Shift Mechanism
NAAT0012
The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch and the other for the low clutch.
These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum.
CONSTRUCTION
NAAT0012S01
1. Torque converter clutch piston
2. Torque converter
3. Oil pump
4. Input shaft
5. Brake band
6. Reverse clutch
7. High clutch
8. Front pinion gear
9. Front sun gear
10. Front internal gear
11. Front planetary carrier
12. Rear sun gear
13. Rear pinion gear
14. Rear internal gear
15. Rear planetary carrier
16. Forward clutch
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE
Clutch and brake components
Reverse clutch
6
High clutch
7
Forward clutch
16
R/C
H/C
F/C
Abbr.
Overrun clutch
18
Brake band
5
Forward one-way clutch
17
Low one-way clutch
19
Low & reverse brake
20
O/C
B/B
F/O.C
L/O.C
L & R/B
17. Forward one-way clutch
18. Overrun clutch
19. Low one-way clutch
20. Low & reverse brake
21. Parking pawl
22. Parking gear
23. Output shaft
SAT509I
NAAT0012S02
Function
To transmit input power to front sun gear
9
.
To transmit input power to front planetary carrier
11
.
To connect front planetary carrier
11
with forward one-way clutch
17
.
To connect front planetary carrier
11
with rear internal gear
14
.
To lock front sun gear
9
.
When forward clutch
16
is engaged, to stop rear internal gear
14
from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.
To stop front planetary carrier
11
from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution.
To lock front planetary carrier
11
.
AT-16
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
CLUTCH AND BAND CHART
NAAT0012S03
Shift position
Reverse clutch
High clutch
Forward clutch
Overrun clutch
2nd apply
Band servo
3rd release
4th apply
Forward one
-way clutch
Low oneway clutch
Low & reverse brake
Lock-up Remarks
P
R
N q q
PARK
POSITION
REVERSE
POSITION
NEUTRAL
POSITION
D*4
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
1st q q q q q
C
*1D
*1A
*1A q
*2C
*3C
C
C q
B
B
B
B
*5q q
Automatic shift
1 k 2 k 3 k
4
2
1
2nd
1st
2nd q q q q q q q q q q
B
B
B
B
B
B q
Automatic shift
1 k 2
Locks (held stationary) in
1st speed
1 g 2
*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is being set in “OFF” position.
*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in “OFF” position.
*5: Operates when overdrive control switch is “OFF”.
q : Operates.
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power transmission.
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-17
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
POWER TRANSMISSION
=NAAT0012S04
“N” and “P” Positions
NAAT0012S0401
I “N” position
No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft since the clutch does not operate.
I “P” position
Similar to the “N” position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
SAT039J
AT-18
“1
1
” Position
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
Low and reverse brake
Engine brake
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
=NAAT0012S0406
As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and reverse brake.
This is different from that of D
1 and 2
1
.
GI
MA
Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SAT100J
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-19
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D
1
” and “2
1
” Positions
Forward one-way clutch
Forward clutch
Low one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
(Engine brake)
OVERALL SYSTEM
=NAAT0012S0402
Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of these three clutches. (Start-up at D
1
)
D
2
1
1
: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”
Throttle opening less than 3/16
: Throttle opening less than 3/16
At D
1 clutch.
and 2
1 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way
AT-20
SAT096J
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D
2
”, “2
2
” and “1
2
” Positions
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Brake band
=NAAT0012S0403
Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front internal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
D
2
2
2
1
2
: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”
Throttle opening less than 3/16
: Throttle opening less than 3/16
: Always engaged
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT097J
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-21
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“D
3
” Position
High clutch
Forward clutch
Forward one-way clutch
Overrun clutch
engagement conditions
OVERALL SYSTEM
=NAAT0012S0404
Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front planetary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward one-way clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.
D
3
: Overdrive control switch in “OFF”
Throttle opening less than 3/16
AT-22
SAT098J
“D
4
” (OD) Position
High clutch
Brake band
Forward clutch
(Does not affect power transmission)
Engine brake
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
=NAAT0012S0405
Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
This front planetary carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and makes front internal gear (output) turn faster.
At D
4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SAT099J
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-23
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
“R” Position
Reverse clutch
Low and reverse brake
Engine brake
OVERALL SYSTEM
=NAAT0012S0407
Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.
Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front internal gear in the opposite direction.
As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be obtained when decelerating.
AT-24
SAT101J
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System
Control System
=NAAT0013
OUTLINE
NAAT0013S01
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks.
TCM ACTUATORS SENSORS
PNP switch
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch
Wide open throttle position switch
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Vehicle speed sensor
Overdrive control switch
ASCD control unit
E
Shift control
Line pressure control
Lock-up control
Overrun clutch control
Timing control
Fail-safe control
Self-diagnosis
CONSULT communication line
Duet-EU control
E
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
O/D OFF indicator lamp
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CONTROL SYSTEM
NAAT0013S02
CL
MT
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT068JA
BT
TF
PD
AX
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-25
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System (Cont’d)
TCM FUNCTION
The function of the TCM is to:
I Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
I Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
I Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM
Sensors and solenoid valves
PNP switch
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch
Wide open throttle position switch
=NAAT0013S03
NAAT0013S04
Function
Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM.
Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.
Detects throttle valve’s fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM.
Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends a signal to TCM.
Input
Engine speed signal
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Revolution sensor
Output
Vehicle speed sensor
Overdrive control switch
ASCD control unit
Shift solenoid valve A/B
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
O/D OFF indicator lamp
From ECM.
Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.
Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.
Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.
Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D
4
TCM.
” (overdrive) position, to the
Sends the cruise signal and “D
4 control unit to TCM.
” (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD
Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent from TCM.
Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction.
Control Mechanism
NAAT0180
LINE PRESSURE CONTROL
NAAT0180S01
TCM has the various line pressure control characteristics to meet the driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve based on TCM characteristics.
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically controlled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.
AT-26
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Normal Control
NAAT0180S0101
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suitable clutch operation.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT003J
Back-up Control (Engine brake)
If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D or D
3
NAAT0180S0102
4
(OD)
, great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the transmission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be increased to deal with this driving force.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT004J
During Shift Change
NAAT0180S0103
The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting shock.
TF
PD
AX
SAT005J
SU
At Low Fluid Temperature
NAAT0180S0104
I
Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-contacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid temperature, to stabilize shifting quality.
BR
ST
RS
BT
I
The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission fluid when temperature is low.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT006J
AT-27
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
OVERALL SYSTEM
I Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to 10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low temperature.
SAT007J
SHIFT CONTROL
NAAT0180S02
The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration performance and fuel economy.
Shift solenoid valve
A
B
Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B
NAAT0180S0201
The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to signals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule memorized in the TCM.
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When set to “ON”, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to the shift valve.
[Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions]
SAT008J
D
1
, 2
1
, 1
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
D
2
, 2
2
, 1
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
Gear position
D
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
D
4
(OD)
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Control of Shift Valves A and B
N-P
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
NAAT0180S0202
SAT047J
AT-28
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves
A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B.
The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward.
LOCK-UP CONTROL
NAAT0180S03
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to oil pressure signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.
Conditions for Lock-up Operation
NAAT0180S0301
When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
Overdrive control switch
Selector lever
Gear position
Vehicle speed sensor
Throttle position sensor
Closed throttle position switch
A/T fluid temperature sensor
ON OFF
“D” position
D
4
More than set value
D
3
Less than set opening
OFF
More than 40°C (104°F)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
NAAT0180S0302
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the
TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the “OFF” period, and opens the circuit during the “ON” period. If the percentage of
OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is reduced and pilot pressure remains high.
The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT010J
OFF-time INCREASING
"
Amount of drain DECREASING
"
Pilot pressure HIGH
"
Lock-up RELEASING
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT011J
AT-29
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
OVERALL SYSTEM
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve Operation
NAAT0180S0303
“D” position
“2” position
“1” position
SAT048J
Lock-up Released
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston remains unlocked.
Lock-up Applied
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly, the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pressure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and release of the lock-up.
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE
CONTROL)
NAAT0180S04
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in downshifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the engine brake is not effective.
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions
NAAT0180S0401
Gear position
D
1
, D
2
, D
3 gear position
2
1
, 2
2 gear position
1
1
, 1
2 gear position
Throttle opening
Less than 3/16
At any position
SAT014J
AT-30
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
NAAT0180S0402
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF signal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control
(engine brake control).
When this solenoid valve is “ON”, the pilot pressure drain port closes. When it is “OFF”, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve “ON” pilot pressure is applied to the end face of the overrun clutch control valve.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT015J
Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation
NAAT0180S0403
When the solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure A is applied to the overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch does not engage.
When the solenoid valve is “OFF”, pilot pressure A is not generated. At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is provided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the overrun clutch to engage.
In the “1” position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT049J
Control Valve
Valve name
I Pressure regulator valve
I Pressure regulator plug
I Pressure regulator sleeve plug
Pressure modifier valve
NAAT0181
FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE
NAAT0181S01
Function
Regulate oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all driving conditions.
Modifier accumulator piston
Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for all driving conditions.
Smooths hydraulic pressure regulated by the pressure modifier valve to prevent pulsations.
Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, 3-2 timing required for shifting.
Regulate accumulator backpressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
Accumulator control valve
Accumulator control sleeve
Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions.
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-31
TF
PD
AX
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Valve (Cont’d)
Shift valve A
Shift valve B
Valve name
Shuttle shift valve S
Overrun clutch control valve
4-2 relay valve
4-2 sequence valve
Servo charger valve
3-2 timing valve
“1” reducing valve
Overrun clutch reducing valve
Torque converter relief valve
Torque converter clutch control valve, torque converter clutch control plug and torque converter clutch control sleeve
Shuttle shift valve D
Function
Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve
A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th
,
3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.
Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve
B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th
,
3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.
Switches hydraulic circuits to provide 3-2 timing control and overrun clutch control in relation to the throttle opening.
Inactivates the overrun clutch to prevent interlocking in 4th gear when the throttle is wide open.
Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simultaneously with application of the brake band in 4th gear. (Interlocking occurs if the overrun clutch engages during D
4 gear operation.)
Memorizes that the transmission is in 4th gear. Prevents the transmission from downshifting from 4th gear to 3rd and then to 2nd in combination with 4-2 sequence valve and shift valves A and B when downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.
Prevents band servo pressure from draining before high clutch operating pressure and band servo releasing pressure drain (from the same circuit) during downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.
An accumulator and a one-way orifice are used in the 2nd gear band servo oil circuit to dampen shifting shock when shifting from 1st to 2nd gear.
To maintain adequate flowrate when downshifting from 4th or 3rd gear to 2nd gear, the servo charger valve directs 2nd gear band servo hydraulic pressure to the circuit without going through the one-way orifice when downshifting from 3rd or a higher gear.
Prevents a late operation of the brake band when shifting selector lever from “D” to
“1” or “2” position while driving in D
3
.
Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when downshifting from the “1” position 2nd gear to 1st gear.
Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In “1” and “2” positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.
Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.
Activate or inactivate the lock-up function.
Also provide smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up system.
Switches hydraulic circuits so that output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve acts on the lock-up valve in the “D” position of 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. (In the “D” position 1st gear, lock-up is inhibited.)
I Lock-up control is not affected in “D” position 2nd, 3rd or 4th gears, unless output pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is generated by a signal from the control unit.
AT-32
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction
Introduction
NAAT0014
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in the ECM memory but not the TCM memory.
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
OBD-II Function for A/T System
NAAT0182
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in relation to A/T system parts.
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
NAAT0015
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
NAAT0015S01
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
NAAT0015S02
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive, the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below.
MIL
Items
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 (1108)
Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 (1201)
Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 (1206)
Except above
One trip detection
X
X
X
Two trip detection
X
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed during vehicle operation.
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
NAAT0016
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC
NAAT0016S01
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
1.
( No Tools)
The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Self-Diagnostic Results) Examples: 1101, 1102, 1103, 1104, etc. For details, refer to EC-70, “DESCRIP-
TION”.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
2.
( with CONSULT or GST)
CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720,
P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012.
(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I
1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I
Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction.
However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT (if available) is recommended.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-33
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
A sample of CONSULT display for DTC is shown at left. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT. Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
SEF895K
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.
SAT365J
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.
SAT364J
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
NAAT0016S0101
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data, and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST. For detail, refer to EC-80, “CONSULT”.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the following priorities to update the data.
AT-34
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
Priority
1
2
3
Freeze frame data
Items
Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 (0701, 0603 - 0608)
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114), P0174 (0209), P0175
(0210)
Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)
1st trip freeze frame data
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
HOW TO ERASE DTC
NAAT0016S02
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as described following.
I
If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
I
When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC-55, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
I
Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
I
1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC)
I
Freeze frame data
I
1st trip freeze frame data
I
System readiness test (SRT) codes
I
Test values
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT)
I
If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
NAAT0016S03
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT “ON” and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”.
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-35
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
SAT382J
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)
NAAT0016S04
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-46. (The engine warm-up
step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC-93, “DESCRIPTION”.
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)
NAAT0016S05
1. If the ignition switch stays “ON” after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch “OFF” once. Wait at least
5 seconds and then turn it “ON” (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-46. (The engine warm-up step
can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by turning the mode selector on the ECM.
Refer to EC-72, “HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES”.
AT-36
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
SAT964I
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
=NAAT0183
1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for checking the blown lamp.
I
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to
EL-101, “Schematic”.
(Or see MIL & Data Link Connectors in EC-587.)
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp should go off.
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For detail, refer to EC-54, “Introduction”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
CONSULT
NAAT0184
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-
SULT)” (AT-38), place check marks for results on the “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET”, AT-55. Reference pages are provided follow-
ing the items.
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning.
Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic procedures.
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT and that indicated in Service Manual may differ slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons:
I
Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
I
Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point where shifts start, and
I Gear position displayed on CONSULT indicates the point where shifts are completed.
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT at the start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of shifting (which is computed by TCM).
4) Additional CONSULT information can be found in the Operation Manual supplied with the CONSULT unit.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-37
CONSULT (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT)
NAAT0184S01
1. Turn on CONSULT and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-92. If result is NG, refer to EL-9, “Sche-
matic”.
SAT038J
2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing operation.
CONSULT performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be displayed at real time.
SAT416J
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE
TCM self-diagnosis
NAAT0184S02
OBD-II (DTC)
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ...
“A/T” “ENGINE”
PNP switch circuit
—
Revolution sensor
VHCL SPEED
SEN·A/T
VEH SPD SEN/CIR
AT
Vehicle speed sensor (Meter)
VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR
A/T 1st gear function
—
—
A/T 2nd gear function
—
A/T 3rd gear function
—
A/T 4th gear function
—
PNP SW/CIRC
A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
I TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal (based on the gear position) from the switch.
I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
I A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
I A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
I A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
I A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
AT-38
Available by
O/D OFF indicator lamp or
“A/T” on CONSULT
—
X
X
—
—
—
—
Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CON-
SULT or GST
P0705
P0720
—
P0731*1
P0732*1
P0733*1
P0734*1
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
“A/T”
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
“ENGINE”
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM self-diagnosis
Available by
O/D OFF indicator lamp or
“A/T” on CONSULT
—
CONSULT (Cont’d)
OBD-II (DTC)
GI
MA
Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CON-
SULT or GST
P0744*1
EM
LC
EC
A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up)
— A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
I A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
Shift solenoid valve A
SHIFT SOLENOID/V
A
SFT SOL A/CIRC
I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
Shift solenoid valve B
SHIFT SOLENOID/V
B
SFT SOL B/CIRC
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OVERRUN CLUTCH
S/V
O/R CLUCH SOL/
CIRC
T/C clutch solenoid valve
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCC SOLENOID/
CIRC
Line pressure solenoid valve
LINE PRESSURE
S/V
Throttle position sensor
Throttle position switch
THROTTLE POSI
SEN
L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
TP SEN/CIRC A/T
Engine speed signal
I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
I TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
ENGINE SPEED SIG
I TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the
ECM.
I TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
A/T fluid temperature sensor
BATT/FLUID TEMP
SEN
TCM (RAM)
ATF TEMP SEN/
CIRC
CONTROL UNIT
(RAM)
TCM (ROM)
—
CONTROL UNIT
(ROM)
TCM (EEPROM)
CONTROL UNIT
(EEPROM)
—
—
I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunctioning.
I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunctioning.
I TCM memory (EEPROM) is malfunctioning.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
P0750
P0755
P1760
P0740
P0745
P1705
P0725
P0710
—
—
—
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-39
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)
Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
“A/T” “ENGINE”
Malfunction is detected when ...
Available by
O/D OFF indicator lamp or
“A/T” on CONSULT
Available by malfunction indicator lamp*2,
“ENGINE” on CON-
SULT or GST
Initial start
INITIAL START
—
No failure
(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDI-
CATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED**)
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL
*2: Refer to EC-70, “DESCRIPTION”.
I This is not a malfunction message (Whenever shutting off a power supply to the TCM, this message appears on the screen.)
I No failure has been detected.
X
X if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T)
Item Display
Monitor item
ECU input signals
Main signals
Description
Vehicle speed sensor 1
(A/T)
(Revolution sensor)
Vehicle speed sensor 2
(Meter)
Throttle position sensor
A/T fluid temperature sensor
THRTL POS
SEN
[V]
FLUID TEMP SE
[V]
Battery voltage
Engine speed
Overdrive control switch
VHCL/S SE·A/T
[km/h] or [mph]
VHCL/S SE·MTR
[km/h] or [mph]
BATTERY VOLT
[V]
ENGINE SPEED
[rpm]
OVERDRIVE SW
[ON/OFF]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
Remarks
NAAT0184S03
I Vehicle speed computed from signal of revolution sensor is displayed.
I Vehicle speed computed from signal of vehicle speed sensor is displayed.
When racing engine in “N” or “P” position with vehicle stationary, CONSULT data may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph).
Vehicle speed display may not be accurate under approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It may not indicate 0 km/h (0 mph) when vehicle is stationary.
I Throttle position sensor signal voltage is displayed.
I A/T fluid temperature sensor signal voltage is displayed.
I Signal voltage lowers as fluid temperature rises.
I Source voltage of TCM is displayed.
I Engine speed, computed from engine speed signal, is displayed.
Engine speed display may not be accurate under approx. 800 rpm. It may not indicate 0 rpm even when engine is not running.
I ON/OFF state computed from signal of overdrive control SW is displayed.
AT-40
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d) switch
Item
P/N position switch
R position switch
D position switch
2 position switch
1 position switch
ASCD cruise signal
ASCD OD cut signal
Kickdown switch
Closed throttle position
Wide open throttle position switch
W/O THRL/P-SW
[ON/OFF]
Gear position
Selector lever position
Vehicle speed
Display
P/N POSI SW
[ON/OFF]
R POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]
D POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]
2 POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]
1 POSITION SW
[ON/OFF]
ASCD·CRUISE
[ON/OFF]
ASCD OD CUT
[ON/OFF]
KICKDOWN SW
[ON/OFF]
CLOSED
THL/SW
[ON/OFF]
GEAR
SLCT LVR POSI
VEHICLE
SPEED
[km/h] or [mph]
Monitor item
ECU input signals
Main signals
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
Description Remarks
I ON/OFF state computed from signal of P/N position SW is displayed.
I ON/OFF state computed from signal of R position
SW is displayed.
I ON/OFF state computed from signal of D position
SW is displayed.
I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 2 position SW, is displayed.
I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of 1 position SW, is displayed.
I Status of ASCD cruise signal is displayed.
ON ... Cruising state
OFF ... Normal running state
I Status of ASCD OD release signal is displayed.
ON ... OD released
OFF ... OD not released
I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of kickdown SW, is displayed.
I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of closed throttle position
SW, is displayed.
I ON/OFF status, computed from signal of wide open throttle position SW, is displayed.
I Gear position data used for computation by TCM, is displayed.
I Selector lever position data, used for computation by TCM, is displayed.
I Vehicle speed data, used for computation by
TCM, is displayed.
I This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted.
I This is displayed even when no ASCD is mounted.
I This is displayed even when no kickdown switch is equipped.
I A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-41
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d) valve
Item
Throttle position
Line pressure duty
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid
Display
THROTTLE
POSI
[/8]
LINE PRES DTY
[%]
TCC S/V DUTY
[%]
SHIFT S/V A
[ON/OFF]
SHIFT S/V B
[ON/OFF]
OVERRUN/C
S/V
[ON/OFF]
Self-diagnosis display lamp
(O/D OFF indicator lamp)
X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
SELF-D DP LMP
[ON/OFF]
Monitor item
ECU input signals
Main signals
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Description Remarks
I Throttle position data, used for computation by
TCM, is displayed.
I A specific value used for control is displayed if failsafe is activated due to error.
I Control value of line pressure solenoid valve, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed.
I Control value of torque converter clutch solenoid valve, computed by
TCM from each input signal, is displayed.
I Control value of shift solenoid valve A, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed.
I Control value of shift solenoid valve B, computed by TCM from each input signal, is displayed.
I Control value of overrun clutch solenoid valve computed by TCM from each input signal is displayed.
I Control status of O/D
OFF indicator lamp is displayed.
Control value of solenoid is displayed even if solenoid circuit is disconnected.
The “OFF” signal is displayed if solenoid circuit is shorted.
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT
NAAT0184S04
CONSULT Setting Procedure
NAAT0184S0401
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect CONSULT to Data link connector for CONSULT. Data link connector for CONSULT is located in instrument lower panel on driver side.
SAT326I
AT-42
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”.
CONSULT (Cont’d)
GI
MA
SEF392I
5. Touch “A/T”.
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
SAT974H
6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.
SAT384J
7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).
SAT975I
8. Touch “START”.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
SAT976I
AT-43
CONSULT (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-
CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
SAT977I
I
When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT screen changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.
SAT978I
10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
SAT979I
SAT980I
11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance with instructions displayed.
SAT981I
AT-44
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.
CONSULT (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT982I
13. CONSULT procedure ended.
If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT983I
DTC work support item
1ST GR FNCTN P0731
2ND GR FNCTN P0732
3RD GR FNCTN P0733
SAT980I
DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE
Description
Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be confirmed.
I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be confirmed.
I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be confirmed.
I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Check item
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
NAAT0184S05
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-45
TF
PD
AX
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
DTC work support item
4TH GR FNCTN P0734
TCC S/V FNCTN P0744
Description
Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be confirmed.
I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
Check item
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
I Line pressure solenoid valve
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)” can be confirmed.
I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being conducted or not)
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT
NAAT0206
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)
NAAT0206S01
Refer to EC-93, “DESCRIPTION”.
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)
Refer to EC-70, “DESCRIPTION”.
NAAT0206S02
SAT491J
TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)
NAAT0206S03
Preparation
NAAT0206S0301
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Connect the handy type vacuum pump to the throttle opener and apply vacuum 25.3 kPa ( 190 mmHg, 7.48 inHg).
3. Disconnect the throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
5. Check continuity of the closed throttle position switch.
Continuity should exist.
(If continuity does not exist, check throttle opener and closed throttle position switch. Then increase vacuum until closed throttle position switch shows continuity.)
6. Go to “DIAGOSIS START” on next page.
SAT694I
AT-46
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Start the engine with selector lever in “P” position. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Wait 5 seconds.
GI
MA
EM
LC
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
EC
SAT967I
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 2.
©
Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-210.
TF
SAT325IA
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-47
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
2 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Turn ignition switch to “ACC” position.
3. Move selector lever from “P” to “D” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
5. Depress and hold overdrive control switch in “OFF” position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) until directed to
release the switch. (If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, go to step 3 on AT-250).
6. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
SAT968I
7. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position (Do not start engine.).
8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).
9. Wait 2 seconds.
10. Move selector lever to “2” position.
11. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).
12. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”) until directed to release the switch.
SAT969I
© GO TO 3.
AT-48
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
3 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2
1. Move selector lever to “1” position.
2. Release the overdrive control switch.
3. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”).
4. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “OFF”).
5. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be “ON”) until directed to release the switch.
GI
MA
EM
LC
6. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release it.
7. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash “ON” and “OFF”).
EC
FE
SAT970I
CL
MT
©
GO TO 4.
4 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.
Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-50.
©
DIAGNOSIS END
TF
PD
SAT981F
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SAT325IA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-49
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE
All judgement flickers are same.
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
1st judgement flicker is longer than others.
NAAT0206S04
SAT436F
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK.
SAT437F
Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION
2nd judgement flicker is longer than others.
3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT439F
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR, AT-199.
SAT441F
Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR, AT-179.
4th judgement flicker is longer than others.
5th judgement flicker is longer than others.
SAT443F
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A, AT-169.
SAT445F
Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B, AT-174.
AT-50
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
6th judgement flicker is longer than others.
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
7th judgement flicker is longer than others.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT447F
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE, AT-188.
SAT449F
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID
8th judgement flicker is longer than others.
9th judgement flicker is longer than others.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
SAT451F
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power source circuit is damaged.
⇒
Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM
SAT453F
Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL, AT-115.
10th judgement flicker is longer than others.
Flickers as shown below.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT455F
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒
Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE, AT-162.
SAT457F
Battery power is low.
Battery has been disconnected for a long time.
Battery is connected conversely.
(When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-51
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
O/D OFF indicator lamp:
Lamp comes on.
SAT367J
PNP switch, overdrive control switch or throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is damaged.
⇒
Go to 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
OVERDRIVE CONTROL AND THROTTLE POSITION
t
1
= 2.5 seconds t
2
= 2.0 seconds t
3
= 1.0 second t
4
= 1.0 second
AT-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
SAT631IB
SAT632I
Introduction
Introduction
NAAT0019
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle position sensor or PNP switch and provides shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermittently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road test with CONSULT (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-57.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The customer can supply good information about such problems, especially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the
example (AT-55) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SEF234G
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Customer name MR/MS
Trans. model
Incident Date
Frequency
Symptoms
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET
Information From Customer
KEY POINTS
WHAT
..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN
..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE
..... Road conditions
HOW
..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
VIN Model & Year
Engine
Manuf. Date
Mileage
In Service Date l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day) l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position) l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D) l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st) l Lockup malfunction l Shift point too high or too low.
l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position) l Noise or vibration l No kickdown l No pattern select
( l Others
Blinks for about 8 seconds.
O/D OFF indicator lamp l Continuously lit
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) l Continuously lit l Not lit l Not lit
)
=NAAT0019S01
NAAT0019S0101
AT-54
1.
2.
3.
4.
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Worksheet
=NAAT0019S0102 l Read the Fail-safe Remarks and listen to customer complaints.
l CHECK A/T FLUID l Leakage (Follow specified procedure) l Fluid condition l Fluid level
Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST.
l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others.
l Torque converter one-way clutch l Reverse clutch l Forward clutch l Overrun clutch l Forward one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake l Low one-way clutch l Engine l Line pressure is low l Clutches and brakes except high clutch and brake band are OK l Pressure test — Suspected parts: l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures.
4-1. Check before engine is started.
l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-105.
l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-110.
l Engine speed signal, AT-115.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-162.
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-169.
l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-174.
l Throttle position sensor, AT-179.
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-188.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-193.
l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199.
l Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-203.
l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-205.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-247.
l Battery l Others
4-2. Check at idle
l 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-210.
l 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” And “N” Position, AT-212.
l 3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-213.
l 4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-214.
l 5. Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position, AT-216.
l 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position, AT-218.
l 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position, AT-221.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
5.
6.
7.
Introduction (Cont’d)
4.
8.
9.
4-3. Cruise test
Part-1 l 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
1 l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
,
2
,
D
D
2
,
D
4
1
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
3
4
,
D
2
l 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
l 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-236.
l 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-238.
l 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-240.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
,
D
3
Part-2 l 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
1
1
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
,
D
2 l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D l 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
,
2
3
D
,
D
2
,
D
4
3
Part-3 l 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D
4
,
D
3
When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”, AT-244
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D
3
l 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 2 l 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2
2
3
,
2
,
1
1
2
, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position, AT-245.
l 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-247.
l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.
2
, When Selector Lever “2” , “1” Position, AT-246.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-105.
l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-110.
l Engine speed signal, AT-115.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-148.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-162.
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-169.
l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-174.
l Throttle position sensor, AT-179.
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-188.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-193.
l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-199.
l Control unit (RAM), control unit (ROM), AT-203.
l Control unit (EEP ROM), AT-205.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-247.
l Battery l Others l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures.
l Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items.
Refer to EC-55, “Emission-related Diagnostic Information”.
l DTC (P0731, 1103) A/T 1st gear function, AT-120.
l DTC (P0732, 1104) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-126.
l DTC (P0733, 1105) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-132.
l DTC (P0734, 1106) A/T 4th gear function, AT-138.
l DTC (P0744, 1107) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-153.
l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged parts.
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible symptoms and the component inspection orders.) l Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories.
EC-55
AT-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow
Work Flow
NAAT0020
HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR
NAAT0020S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-54) and “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-55), to perform the best troubleshooting possible.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-57
Work Flow (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW CHART
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
NAAT0020S02
AT-58
*18: EC-55
SAT086JF
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check
A/T Fluid Check
NAAT0021
FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK
NAAT0021S01
1. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating surface of converter housing and transmission case.
2. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in “D” position and wait a few minutes.
3. Stop engine.
4. Check for fresh leakage.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT638A
FLUID CONDITION CHECK
Fluid color
Dark or black with burned odor
Milky pink
Varnished fluid, light to dark brown and tacky
EC
NAAT0021S02
Suspected problem
Wear of frictional material
Water contamination — Road water entering through filler tube or breather
Oxidation — Over or under filling, —
Overheating
FE
CL
MT
FLUID LEVEL CHECK
Refer to MA-24, “Checking A/T Fluid”.
NAAT0021S03
TF
PD
AX
SU
Stall Test
NAAT0022
STALL TEST PROCEDURE
NAAT0022S01
1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
BR
ST
RS
SAT647B
BT
3. Set parking brake and block wheels.
4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
I
It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified engine rpm on indicator.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT513G
AT-59
TB112100c 2000 Pathfinder July 2000
SM0E-1R50U2
ARROW INDICATES AMENDED INFORMATION
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Stall Test (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT392H
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-61
Line Pressure Test
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test
NAAT0023
I
Location of line pressure test ports.
I
Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-sealing bolts.
SAT209GA
LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE
NAAT0023S01
1. Check A/T fluid and engine oil levels. If necessary, add fluid and oil.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until fluid and oil reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
SAT647B
3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.
SAT518GB
SAT519GB
4. Set parking brake and block wheels.
I
Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure test is being performed at stall speed.
SAT513G
AT-62
At idle
At stall speed
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test (Cont’d)
5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
I
When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the stall test procedure.
Line pressure:
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT493G
Judgement
Line pressure is low in all positions.
Line pressure is low in particular position.
JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST
NAAT0023S02
Suspected parts
I Oil pump wear
I Control piston damage
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
I Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve
I Clogged strainer
I Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
I For example, line pressure is:
— Low in “R” and “1” positions, but
— Normal in “D” and “2” positions.
Then, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit.
Refer to “CLUTCH AND BAND CHART”, AT-17.
Line pressure is high.
Line pressure is low.
I Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor
I Fluid temperature sensor damaged
I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Open in dropping resistor circuit
I Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor
I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pilot valve sticking
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT786A
BT
Road Test
NAAT0024
DESCRIPTION
NAAT0024S01
I
The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of
A/T and analyze causes of problems.
I The road test consists of the following three parts:
1. Check before engine is started
2. Check at idle
3. Cruise test
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-63
Road Test (Cont’d)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
I Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures and items to check.
I
Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.
Refer to “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIP-
TION” and “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS”,
AT-33 - AT-50 and AT-207 - AT-247.
SAT496G
1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED
NAAT0024S02
SAT967I
4. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 2.
©
Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-210.
SAT325IA
AT-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
2 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP
Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?
Road Test (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
Yes
No
SAT325IA
Yes or No
©
Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (No Tools),
©
GO TO 3.
FE
CL
MT
3 CHECK NG ITEM
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (No Tools), AT-46.
©
Go to “2. Check at idle”, AT-66.
TF
RS
BT
HA
SC
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
2. CHECK AT IDLE
1 CHECK ENGINE START
1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
3. Move selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn ignition switch to start position.
5. Is engine started?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 2.
©
Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-212.
2 CHECK ENGINE START
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Move selector lever to “D”, “1”, “2” or “R” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to start position.
4. Is engine started?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-212.
©
GO TO 3.
3 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Move selector lever to “P” position.
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?
=NAAT0024S03
Yes
No
SAT796A
Yes or No
©
Go to “3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed”, AT-213.
©
GO TO 4.
4 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Apply parking brake.
2. Move selector lever to “N” position.
3. Turn ignition switch to “START” position and start engine.
4. Release parking brake.
5. Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Go to “4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves”, AT-214.
©
GO TO 5.
AT-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
5 CHECK SHIFT SHOCK
1. Apply foot brake.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Is there large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position?
Road Test (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Go to “5. Large Shock. “N” , “R” Position”, AT-216.
© GO TO 6.
6 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released?
Yes
No
Yes or No
© GO TO 7.
©
Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-218.
7 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Move selector lever to “D”, “2” and “1” position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Go to “3. Cruise test”, AT-67.
©
Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position”, AT-221.
SAT082J
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SMA185C
RS
BT
3. CRUISE TEST
I
Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.
NAAT0024S04
With CONSULT
NAAT0024S0401
I
Using CONSULT, conduct a cruise test and record the result.
I
Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place as per “Shift Schedule”.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-67
Road Test (Cont’d)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
CONSULT Setting Procedure
NAAT0024S0402
1. Turn ignition switch “OFF”.
2. Connect “CONSULT” to Data link connector for CONSULT.
Data link connector for CONSULT is located in instrument lower panel on driver side.
SAT326I
3. Turn ignition switch “ON”.
4. Touch “START”.
SEF392I
5. Touch “A/T”.
SAT974H
6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.
SAT385J
7. Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition.
SAT902H
AT-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
8. Touch “LONG TIME” and “ENTER” key.
Road Test (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT297C
9. Go back to SELECT MONITOR ITEM and touch “MAIN SIG-
NALS”.
10. Touch “START”.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT903H
11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”.
TF
PD
AX
SAT071H
12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.
SAT072H
13. Touch “DISPLAY”.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
SAT301C
AT-69
Road Test (Cont’d)
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
14. Touch “PRINT”.
SAT904H
15. Touch “PRINT” again.
SAT905H
16. Check the monitor data printed out.
17. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.
SAT906H
Without CONSULT
NAAT0024S0403
I
Throttle position sensor can be checked by voltage across terminals 41 and 42 of TCM.
SAT513J
AT-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Cruise Test — Part 1
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D
1
) POSITION
1. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park vehicle on flat surface.
3. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.
4. Move selector lever to “P” position.
5. Start engine.
6. Move selector lever to “D” position.
Road Test (Cont’d)
=NAAT0024S0404
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT001J
MT
7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway.
8. Does vehicle start from D
1
?
Read gear position.
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 2.
©
Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
TF
PD
SAT952I
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT953I
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
2 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
1
TO D
2
)
Does A/T shift from D
1 to D
2 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.
1 to D
2
:
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 3.
©
Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
1
,
D
2 or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
,
D
2
SAT954I
3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
2
TO D
3
)
Does A/T shift from D
2 to D
3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.
2 to D
3
:
SAT955I
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 4.
©
Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
2
,
D
3
AT-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.
3 to D
4
:
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 5.
©
Go to “11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
,
D
4
5 CHECK LOCK-UP (D
4
TO D
4
L/U)
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when lock-up occurs:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.
Road Test (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT956I
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 6.
©
Go to “12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up”, AT-236.
6 CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP
Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
Yes
No
Yes or No
© GO TO 7.
©
Go to “13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition”, AT-238.
SAT957I
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
7 CHECK LOCK-UP OFF (D
4
L/U TO D
4
)
1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?
SAT958I
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 8.
©
Go to “14. Lock-up Is Not Released”, AT-240.
8 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D
4
TO D
3
)
1. Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
2. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D
4
Read gear position and engine speed.
to D
3
?
Yes
No
SAT959I
Yes or No
©
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 2”, AT-75.
©
Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
,
D
3
AT-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Cruise Test — Part 2
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D
1
) POSITION
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.
4. Does vehicle start from D
1
?
Read gear position.
Road Test (Cont’d)
=NAAT0024S0405
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT495G
CL
MT
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 2.
©
Go to “16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D
1
2 CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D
3
TO D
4
TO D
2
)
1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully.
3. Does A/T shift from D
4 to D
2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully?
Read gear position and throttle position.
Yes
No
SU
BR
Yes or No
©
GO TO 3.
©
Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
,
D
4
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
,
D
2
SAT404H
ST
RS
BT
TF
PD
AX
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
2
TO D
3
)
Does A/T shift from D
2 to D
3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-345.
2 to D
3
:
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 4.
©
Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
2
,
D
3
4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
) AND ENGINE BRAKE
Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4
2 to D
3
.
and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
SAT960I
SAT405H
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 3”, AT-77.
© Go to “11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
,
D
4
AT-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Cruise Test — Part 3
1 VEHICLE SPEED D
4
POSITION
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in “ON” position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in “D” position.
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D
4
.
Road Test (Cont’d)
=NAAT0024S0406
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT812A
CL
MT
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D
4
TO D
3
)
1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Set overdrive control switch to “OFF” position while driving in D
3. Does A/T shift from D
4 to D
3
(O/D OFF)?
Read gear position and vehicle speed.
4
.
Yes
No
SU
SAT999IA
Yes or No
©
GO TO 3.
©
Go to “17. A/T Does Not Shift: D
4
,
D
3
, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”,
BR
ST
RS
BT
TF
PD
AX
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
3 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes
No
SAT999IA
Yes or No
©
GO TO 4.
©
Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
,
D
3
4 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D
3
TO D
2
)
1. Move selector lever from “D” to “2” position while driving in D
3
2. Does A/T shift from D
3
(O/D OFF) to 2
2
?
Read gear position.
(O/D OFF).
Yes
No
SAT791GB
Yes or No
©
GO TO 5.
©
Go to “18. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
,
D
2
, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position”,
AT-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
5 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Road Test (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
Yes
No
EC
SAT791GB
Yes or No
©
GO TO 6.
©
Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
,
D
3
FE
CL
MT
6 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (2
2
TO 1
1
)
1. Move selector lever from “2” to “1” position while driving in 2
2. Does A/T shift from 2
2 to 1
1 position?
2
.
Yes
No
TF
PD
AX
SAT778B
Yes or No
©
GO TO 7.
©
Go to “19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2
2
,
1
1
, When Selector lever “2” , “1” Position”, AT-246.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
7 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE
Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Yes
No
SAT778B
Yes or No
©
1. Stop vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
©
Go to “20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake”, AT-247.
AT-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart
Numbers are arranged in the order of inspection.
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item
1. Ignition switch and starter
Engine does not start in “N”, “P” positions.
ON vehicle
Engine starts in position other than “N” and “P” positions.
ON vehicle
Transmission noise in “P” and “N” positions.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Vehicle moves when changing into “P” position or parking gear does not disengage when shifted out of “P” position.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Vehicle runs in “N” position.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Vehicle will not run in “R” position (but runs in “D”, “2” and “1” positions).
Clutch slips.
Very poor acceleration.
OFF vehicle
2. Control linkage
3. PNP switch
1. Control linkage
2. PNP switch
1. Fluid level
2. Line pressure
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
4. Revolution sensor and vehicle speed sensor
5. Engine speed signal
6. Oil pump
7. Torque converter
1. Control linkage
2. Parking components
1. Control linkage
2. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
3. Forward clutch
4. Reverse clutch
5. Overrun clutch
1. Control linkage
2. Line pressure
3. Line pressure solenoid valve
4. Control valve assembly
5. Reverse clutch
6. High clutch
7. Forward clutch
8. Overrun clutch
9. Low & reverse brake
Symptom Chart
NAAT0026
GI
MA
Reference Page
EL-9, “Schematic” and
SC-6, “System
Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Vehicle braked when shifting into “R” position.
Sharp shock in shifting from “N” to “D” position.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Vehicle will not run in “D” and “2” positions (but runs in “1” and “R” positions).
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Vehicle will not run in “D”, “1”, “2” positions (but runs in “R” position).
Clutch slips. Very poor acceleration.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
5. Control valve assembly
6. High clutch
7. Brake band
8. Forward clutch
9. Overrun clutch
1. Engine idling rpm
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. A/T fluid temperature sensor
5. Engine speed signal
6. Line pressure solenoid valve
7. Control valve assembly
8. Accumulator N-D
9. Forward clutch
1. Control linkage
2. Low one-way clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Line pressure
3. Line pressure solenoid valve
4. Control valve assembly
5. Accumulator N-D
6. Reverse clutch
7. High clutch
8. Forward clutch
9. Forward one-way clutch
10. Low one-way clutch
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
AT-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in starting.
Excessive creep.
No creep at all.
Failure to change gear from “D
1
“D
2
”.
” to
Failure to change gear from “D
2
“D
3
”.
” to
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level
2. Control linkage
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
4. Line pressure
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
6. Control valve assembly
7. Accumulator N-D
8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
9. Forward clutch
10. Reverse clutch
11. Low & reverse brake
12. Oil pump
13. Torque converter
1. Engine idling rpm
1. Fluid level
2. Line pressure
3. Control valve assembly
4. Forward clutch
5. Oil pump
6. Torque converter
1. PNP switch
2. Control linkage
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Control valve assembly
5. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
6. Brake band
1. PNP switch
2. Control linkage
3. Shift solenoid valve B
4. Control valve assembly
5. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
6. High clutch
7. Brake band
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Failure to change gear from “D
3
“D
4
”.
” to
Too high a gear change point from
“D
“D
1
3
” to “D
” to “D
2
4
”, from “D
2
”.
” to “D
3
”, from
Gear change directly from “D
1 occurs.
” to “D
3
”
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Engine stops when shifting lever into
“R”, “D”, “2” and “1”.
Too sharp a shock in change from
“D
1
” to “D
2
”.
Too sharp a shock in change from
“D
2
” to “D
3
”.
Too sharp a shock in change from
“D
3
” to “D
4
”.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
1. PNP switch
Diagnostic Item
2. Control linkage
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
6. Brake band
Reference Page
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Shift solenoid valve B
EC-181, “Description”.
1. Fluid level
2. Accumulator 1-2
3. Brake band
1. Engine idling rpm
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
3. Control valve assembly
4. Torque converter
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Line pressure
3. Accumulator 1-2
4. Control valve assembly
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
6. Brake band
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Line pressure
3. Accumulator 2-3
4. Control valve assembly
5. High clutch
6. Brake band
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Line pressure
3. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
4. Control valve assembly
5. Brake band
6. Overrun clutch
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
AT-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Almost no shock or clutches slipping in change from “D
1
” to “D
2
”.
Almost no shock or slipping in change from “D
2
” to “D
3
”.
ON vehicle
Almost no shock or slipping in change from “D
3
” to “D
4
”.
ON vehicle
Vehicle braked by gear change from
“D
1
” to “D
2
”.
Vehicle braked by gear change from
“D
2
” to “D
3
”.
Vehicle braked by gear change from
“D
3
” to “D
4
”.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
OFF vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Accumulator 1-2
5. Control valve assembly
6. Brake band
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Accumulator 2-3
5. Control valve assembly
6. High clutch
7. Brake band
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R)
5. Control valve assembly
6. High clutch
7. Brake band
1. Fluid level
2. Reverse clutch
3. Low & reverse brake
4. High clutch
5. Low one-way clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Brake band
1. Fluid level
2. Overrun clutch
3. Forward one-way clutch
4. Reverse clutch
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Maximum speed not attained. Acceleration poor.
Failure to change gear from “D
4
“D
3
”.
” to
Failure to change gear from “D
3
“D
2
” or from “D
4
” to “D
2
”.
” to
Failure to change gear from “D
2
“D
1
” or from “D
3
” to “D
1
”.
” to
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Gear change shock felt during deceleration by releasing accelerator pedal. ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level
2. PNP switch
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Shift solenoid valve B
5. Control valve assembly
6. Reverse clutch
7. High clutch
8. Brake band
9. Low & reverse brake
10. Oil pump
11. Torque converter
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
4. Shift solenoid valve A
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
6. Control valve assembly
7. Low & reverse brake
8. Overrun clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Shift solenoid valve B
5. Control valve assembly
6. High clutch
7. Brake band
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Shift solenoid valve B
5. Control valve assembly
6. Low one-way clutch
7. High clutch
8. Brake band
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Line pressure
3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
4. Control valve assembly
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
AT-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Condition Symptom
Too high a change point from “D
4
“D
3
“D
1
”, from “D
3
”.
” to “D
2
”, from “D
2
” to
” to
Kickdown does not operate when depressing pedal in “D
4
” within kickdown vehicle speed.
Kickdown operates or engine overruns when depressing pedal in “D kickdown vehicle speed limit.
4
” beyond ON vehicle
Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D depressing pedal.
4
” to “D
3
” when
Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D depressing pedal.
4
” to “D
2
” when
Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D depressing pedal.
3
” to “D
2
” when
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Shift solenoid valve B
1. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Shift solenoid valve B
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
5. Control valve assembly
6. High clutch
7. Forward clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
5. Shift solenoid valve A
6. Control valve assembly
7. Brake band
8. Forward clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
5. Control valve assembly
6. A/T fluid temperature sensor
7. Accumulator 2-3
8. Brake band
9. Forward clutch
10. High clutch
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Races extremely fast or slips in changing from “D
4
” or “D when depressing pedal.
3
” to “D
1
”
Vehicle will not run in any position.
Transmission noise in “D”, “2”, “1” and
“R” positions.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Failure to change from “D
3
” to “2” when changing lever into “2” position.
ON vehicle
Gear change from “2
2 position.
” to “2
3
” in “2”
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
3. Line pressure
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
5. Control valve assembly
6. Forward clutch
7. Forward one-way clutch
8. Low one-way clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Control linkage
3. Line pressure
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
5. Oil pump
6. High clutch
7. Brake band
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
8. Low & reverse brake
9. Torque converter
1. Fluid level
2. Torque converter
1. PNP switch
2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
EC-181, “Description”.
3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
4. Shift solenoid valve B
5. Shift solenoid valve A
6. Control valve assembly
7. Control linkage
8. Brake band
9. Overrun clutch
1. PNP switch
AT-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
Engine brake does not operate in “1” position.
ON vehicle
Gear change from “1
1 position.
” to “1
2
” in “1”
Does not change from “1
2
“1” position.
” to “1
1
” in
Large shock changing from “1
2 in “1” position.
” to “1
1
”
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Transmission overheats.
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
1. PNP switch
Diagnostic Item
2. Control linkage
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
4. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
5. Shift solenoid valve A
6. Control valve assembly
7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
8. Overrun clutch
9. Low & reverse brake
1. PNP switch
2. Control linkage
1. PNP switch
2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
3. Shift solenoid valve A
4. Control valve assembly
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
6. Overrun clutch
7. Low & reverse brake
1. Control valve assembly
2. Low & reverse brake
1. Fluid level
2. Engine idling rpm
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
4. Line pressure
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
6. Control valve assembly
7. Oil pump
8. Reverse clutch
9. High clutch
10. Brake band
11. Forward clutch
12. Overrun clutch
13. Low & reverse brake
14. Torque converter
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
EC-181, “Description”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom
ATF shoots out during operation.
White smoke emitted from exhaust pipe during operation.
Offensive smell at fluid charging pipe.
OFF vehicle
Torque converter is not locked up.
Torque converter clutch piston slip.
Condition
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Lock-up point is extremely high or low.
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Fluid level
2. Reverse clutch
3. High clutch
4. Brake band
5. Forward clutch
6. Overrun clutch
7. Low & reverse brake
1. Fluid level
2. Torque converter
3. Oil pump
4. Reverse clutch
5. High clutch
6. Brake band
7. Forward clutch
8. Overrun clutch
Reference Page
9. Low & reverse brake
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
3. PNP switch
4. Engine speed signal
5. A/T fluid temperature sensor
6. Line pressure
7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
8. Control valve assembly
9. Torque converter
1. Fluid level
2. Line pressure
3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
4. Line pressure solenoid valve
EC-181, “Description”.
5. Line pressure solenoid valve
6. Control valve assembly
7. Torque converter
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
EC-181, “Description”.
2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
4. Control valve assembly
AT-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)
Symptom Condition
A/T does not shift to “D
4
” when driving with overdrive control switch “ON”.
ON vehicle
OFF vehicle
Engine is stopped at “R”, “D”, “2” and
“1” positions.
ON vehicle
Diagnostic Item
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment)
2. PNP switch
3. Revolution sensor and speed sensor
4. Shift solenoid valve A
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve
6. Control valve assembly
7. A/T fluid temperature sensor
8. Line pressure
9. Brake band
10. Overrun clutch
1. Fluid level
2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
3. Shift solenoid valve B
4. Shift solenoid valve A
5. Control valve assembly
Reference Page
EC-181, “Description”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value
TCM Terminals and Reference Value
=NAAT0027
PREPARATION
NAAT0027S01
I
Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48 by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.
SAT216J
4
5*1
6*1
7*1
8
9
Terminal
No.
Wire color
1
2
3
10
GY
W/R
Item
Line pressure solenoid valve
BR/Y
Line pressure solenoid valve
(with dropping resistor)
G/OR
—
PU/W
P/B
P
—
—
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
—
DT1
DT2
DT3
—
—
Power source
SAT217JB
TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT
NAAT0027S02
TCM INSPECTION TABLE
NAAT0027S03
(Data are reference values.)
Condition
Judgement standard
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
1.5 - 3.0V
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
0.5V or less
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
5 - 14V
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
0.5V or less
When A/T performs lock-up.
8 - 15V
When A/T does not perform lock- up.
—
—
—
—
—
—
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
1V or less
—
—
—
—
—
—
Battery voltage
1V or less
AT-92
Terminal
No.
Wire color
11
12
13
14
15*1
16
17
18
L/W
L/R
GY
—
Y/G
OR/W
OR/B
B/Y
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Item
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
O/D OFF indicator lamp
—
OBD-II output
Closed throttle position switch
(in throttle position switch)
Wide open throttle position switch
(in throttle position switch)
ASCD cruise signal
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
4
”.)
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
(When driving in “D
2
” or “D
3
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
2
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
(When driving in “D
3
” or “D
4
”.)
When setting overdrive control switch in “ON” position.
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
Battery voltage
1V or less
Battery voltage
When setting overdrive control switch in
“OFF” position.
—
1V or less
—
—
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.
—
Battery voltage
When depressing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.
When depressing accelerator pedal more than half-way after warming up engine.
1V or less
Battery voltage
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
1V or less
When ASCD cruise is being performed.
(“CRUISE” light comes on.)
Battery voltage
When ASCD cruise is not being performed.
(“CRUISE” light does not comes on.)
1V or less
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
19 W/R Power source Same as No. 10
RS
BT
20
21
22
23
L/B
—
GY
—
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
—
Overdrive control switch
—
When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate.
—
When setting overdrive control switch in “ON” position
When setting overdrive control switch in
“OFF” position
—
1V or less
—
Battery voltage
1V or less
—
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Terminal
No.
Wire color
24
25
26
27
28
W/G
B
G
G/W
R/Y
Item
ASCD OD cut signal
Ground
PNP switch “1” position
PNP switch “2” position
Power source
(Memory back-up) or
Condition
When “ACCEL” set switch on ASCD cruise is released.
When “ACCEL” set switch on ASCD cruise is applied.
—
When setting selector lever to “1” position.
Judgement standard
More than
4.5V
1V or less
—
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
1V or less
When setting selector lever to “2” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
1V or less
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
Battery voltage
29
30*2
31*2
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
W
W
L
P/B
—
L
Y
P
—
—
Revolution sensor
(Measure in AC range)
—
—
Throttle position sensor
(Power source)
—
PNP switch “D” position
PNP switch “R” position
PNP switch “N” or
“P” position
—
—
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH).
When vehicle parks.
—
—
—
Battery voltage
1V or more
Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.
0V
—
—
4.5 - 5.5V
—
When setting selector lever to “D” position.
—
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
1V or less
When setting selector lever to “R” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
1V or less
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions.
—
—
1V or less
—
—
AT-94
Terminal
No.
Wire color
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)
Item Condition
Judgement standard
GI
MA
39 W/B
Engine speed signal
When engine runs at idle speed.
0.5 - 2.5V
EM
40
41
W/L
P
Vehicle speed sensor
Throttle position sensor
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2
MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
Voltage varies between less than 1.0V and more than
4.5V.
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately
0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately
4V
42
45
46
B
—
—
Throttle position sensor
(Ground)
—
—
—
—
—
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
47 R
A/T fluid temperature sensor
48 B Ground
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
—
*1: These terminals are connected to the ECM.
*2: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT.
—
—
—
Approximately
1.5V
Approximately
0.5V
—
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN
NAAT0185
AT-96
MAT752A
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
10
19
W/R
W/R
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0185S01
Power source
Power source
Condition
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
Same as No. 10
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
GI
MA
EM
LC
25 B Ground — —
EC
28 R/Y
Power source
(Memory back-up) or
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
Battery voltage
FE
CL
48 B Ground — —
MT
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
SU
BR
OK
NG
SAT514J
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
I Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to EL-9, “Schematic”.
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-97
TF
PD
AX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)
2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between terminals 25, 48 and ground.
Continuity should exist.
OK
NG
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SAT515J
AT-98
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description
Description
NAAT0028
I
The PNP switch assemble includes a transmission range switch.
I
The transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT516J
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
26
27
34
35
36
G
G/W
L
Y
P
PNP switch “1” position
PNP switch “2” position
PNP switch “D” position
PNP switch “R” position
PNP switch “N” or
“P” position
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0028S02
Condition
When setting selector lever to “1” position.
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less
When setting selector lever to “2” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less
When setting selector lever to “D” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less
When setting selector lever to “R” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less
When setting selector lever to “N” or “P” position.
Battery voltage
When setting selector lever to other positions. 1V or less
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
Diagnostic trouble code
: PNP SW/CIRC
: P0705
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the correct voltage signal from the switch based on the gear position.
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The PNP switch circuit is open or shorted.)
I PNP switch
NAAT0028S03
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-99
Description (Cont’d)
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
SEF895K
SAT911I
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0028S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”)
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “ON” or “OFF” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle position sensor more than 1.3V and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “ON” or “OFF” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-100
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW
NAAT0186
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT753A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-101
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0029
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITH CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.
OK
NG
SAT761I
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Check the following items:
I PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-104.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
I Diode (P, N position)
AT-102
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (WITHOUT CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0205
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
SAT517J
Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?
© GO TO 3.
©
Check the following items:
I PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-104.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
I Diode (P, N position)
TF
PD
AX
SU
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-100.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-103
Component Inspection
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
SAT517GB
Component Inspection
NAAT0030
PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
NAAT0030S02
1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through each position.
Terminal No.
Lever position
P
R
N
D
2
1
1 - 2
3 - 5
1 - 2
3 - 7
3 - 8
3 - 9
3 - 4
3 - 6
SAT843BG
2. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-265.
SAT807B
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-265.
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
SAT386HC
AT-104
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description
Description
NAAT0031
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
GI
MA
SAT342HA
FE
CL
MT
SAT021J
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0031S04
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Condition
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
"
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
Specification
Approximately 1.5V
"
Approximately 0.5V
TF
PD
AX
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0031S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
42 B
Throttle position sensor
(Ground)
Condition
—
Judgement standard
—
SU
BR
ST
47 R
A/T fluid temperature sensor
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Approximately
1.5V
Approximately
0.5V
RS
BT
Diagnostic trouble code
: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
: P0710
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0031S03
TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
HA
SC
EM
LC
EC
EL
IDX
AT-105
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description (Cont’d)
SEF895K
SAT911I
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0031S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continuously.)
CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for more than 10 minutes (Total).
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full open position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driving for more than 10 minutes (Total).
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-106
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS
NAAT0187
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT754A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-107
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assmebly.
3. Check resistance between terminals 33 and 35 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].
NAAT0032
Is resistance approx. 2.5 k
Ω
?
Yes (With CONSULT)
©
GO TO 2.
Yes (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 3.
No
©
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-109.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITH CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
→
Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V
→
0.5V
SAT191IA
OK
NG
SAT076H
OK or NG
© GO TO 4.
©
Check the following item:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
AT-108
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR (WITHOUT CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
→
Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V
→
0.5V
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
OK
NG
FE
SAT518J
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following item:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
CL
MT
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-106.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
TF
PD
AX
SAT687I
SU
Component Inspection
NAAT0033
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NAAT0033S01
I
I
Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 while changing temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)
20 (68)
80 (176)
Resistance
Approximately 2.5 k Ω
Approximately 0.3 k Ω
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-109
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description
Description
NAAT0034
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the out put shaft parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
29 W
SAT516J
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Condition
Revolution sensor
(Measure in AC range)
When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h (19 MPH).
When vehicle parks.
NAAT0034S02
1V or more
Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.
0V
Judgement standard
42 B
Throttle position sensor
(Ground)
— —
Diagnostic trouble code
: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
: P0720
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
NAAT0034S03
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Revolution sensor
AT-110
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description (Cont’d)
SAT974H
SAT385J
SEF895K
SAT911I
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0034S01
CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
2) Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Driving pattern: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Driving pattern: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions required for this test.
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 30 km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-111
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T
NAAT0188
AT-112
MAT755A
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0035
1 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-114.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 3.
NG
©
Repair or replace revolution sensor.
GI
MA
EM
LC
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
EC
FE
CL
MT
OK
NG
TF
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between revolution sensor and ECM (Main harness)
I Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-137, “WIRING DIAGRAM”.
SAT076H
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-113
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 29 and ground while driving.
(Measure with AC range.)
Voltage:
At 0 km/h (0 MPH):
0V
At 30 km/h (19 MPH):
1V or more
(Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.)
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between revolution sensor and ECM (Main harness)
I Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC-137, “WIRING DIAGRAM”.
SAT519J
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-111.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
SAT210IA
Component Inspection
REVOLUTION SENSOR
I
I
Check resistance between terminals 1, 2 and 3.
Terminal No.
1
2
1
2
3
3
NAAT0036
NAAT0036S01
Resistance
500 - 650 Ω
No continuity
No continuity
AT-114
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description
Description
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
NAAT0037
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0037S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item Condition
Judgement standard
GI
MA
EM
39 W/B
Diagnostic trouble code
: ENGINE SPEED SIG
: P0725
LC
Engine speed signal
When engine runs at idle speed.
0.5 - 2.5V
EC
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0037S03
FE
TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from ECM.
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
CL
MT
SEF895K
SAT911I
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0037S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 10 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 10 consecutive seconds.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-115
Description (Cont’d)
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-116
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS
NAAT0189
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT756A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-117
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM
Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 2.
OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 3.
NG
©
Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-454, “IGNITION COIL &
POWER TRANSISTOR”.
NAAT0038
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITH CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position.
Yes
No
Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V?
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
I Resistor
I Ignition coil
Refer to EC-454, “IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR”.
SAT076H
AT-118
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (WITHOUT CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 39 and ground.
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT520J
FE
Yes
No
Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V?
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
I Resistor
I Ignition coil
Refer to EC-454, “IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR”.
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-115.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-119
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
NAAT0039
I
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
I
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
11
12
L/W
L/R
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0039S02
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
4
”.)
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
(When driving in “D
2
” or “D
3
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
2
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
(When driving in “D
3
” or “D
4
”.)
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
Battery voltage
1V or less
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0039S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open
*: P0731 is detected.
1
1
2*
4*
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
4
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN
: P0731
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Check item (Possible cause)
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-120
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
SAT974H
SAT385J
SAT021J
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0039S01
CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).
3) Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “2” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-124.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to the following step.
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “1” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
I
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-121
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
Malfunction for P0731 exists.
2 , 2 , 3 , 3
4 , 3 , 3 , 4
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-124.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 20 to 25 km/h (12 to 16 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-122
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST
NAAT0190
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT757A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-123
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-125.
NAAT0040
SAT648I
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-290.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Repair control valve assembly.
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-121.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
AT-124
SAT367H
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B
I
=NAAT0041
NAAT0041S01
Resistance Check
NAAT0041S0101
I
Check resistance between terminals (3 or 2) and ground.
Resistance (Approx.) Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
3
Terminal No.
Ground
2
20 - 40 Ω
SAT649I
Operation Check
NAAT0041S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (3 or 2) and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT648I
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-125
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
NAAT0042
I
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
I
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, etc.
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
12 L/R
Shift solenoid valve B
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0042S02
Condition
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
2
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
(When driving in “D
3
” or “D
4
”.)
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
Gear position supposed by TCM
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open
*: P0732 is detected.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0042S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
4 3* 3 4
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 2ND GR FNCTN
: P0732
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Check item (Possible cause)
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-126
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
SAT974H
SAT385J
SAT021J
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0042S01
CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).
3) Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “3” or “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-130.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to following step.
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “2” when depressing accelerator pedal to WOT.
I
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists
Malfunction for P0732 exists.
1 , 2 , 3 , 4
4 , 3 , 3 , 4
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-127
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-130. Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 52 to 57 km/h (32 to 35 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-128
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND
NAAT0191
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT758A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-129
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
I Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-131.
NAAT0043
SAT650I
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-290.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 3.
© Repair control valve assembly.
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-127.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
AT-130
SAT367H
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
I
NAAT0044
NAAT0044S01
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B 2
Terminal No.
Ground
NAAT0044S0101
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40 Ω
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT651I
Operation Check
NAAT0044S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT650I
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-131
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
NAAT0045
I
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
I
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston or brake band, etc.
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
11 L/W
Shift solenoid valve A
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0045S02
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
4
”.)
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
(When driving in “D
2
” or “D
3
”.)
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
Gear position supposed by TCM
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck closed
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0045S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck closed.
1 2 3 4
1
1
2
1
3
4*
4
4
*: P0733 is detected.
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
: P0733
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Check item (Possible cause)
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
AT-132
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
SAT974H
SAT385J
SAT021J
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0045S01
CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).
3) Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “4” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-136.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to following step.
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “3” when depressing accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
I
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists.
Malfunction for P0733 exists.
1 , 2 , 3 , 4
1 , 1 , 4 , 4
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-133
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1.0/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 75 to 90 km/h (47 to 56 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-134
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD
NAAT0192
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT759A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-135
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation.
I Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-137.
NAAT0046
SAT653I
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.
2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-290.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 3.
© Repair control valve assembly.
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-133.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
AT-136
SAT367H
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
I
NAAT0047
NAAT0047S01
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A 3
Terminal No.
Ground
NAAT0047S0101
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40 Ω
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT654I
Operation Check
NAAT0047S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT653I
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-137
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description
Description
NAAT0048
I
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
I
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0048S04
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty
Line pressure solenoid valve duty
Condition
Lock-up “OFF”
"
Lock-up “ON”
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
"
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
Specification
Approximately 4%
"
Approximately 94%
Approximately 24%
"
Approximately 95%
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
1
2
11
12
G/Y
BR/Y
L/W
L/R
Line pressure solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
(with dropping resistor)
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0048S02
Condition
Judgement standard
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
1.5 - 2.5V
0.5V or less
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
4
”.)
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
(When driving in “D
2
” or “D
3
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
2
”.)
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
(When driving in “D
3
” or “D
4
”.)
5 - 14V
0.5V or less
Battery voltage
1V or less
Battery voltage
1V or less
AT-138
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
Gear position supposed by TCM
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed
*: P0734 is detected.
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
=NAAT0048S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1 2 2 1*
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
: P0734
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear position even if electrical circuit is good.
Check item (Possible cause)
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Line pressure solenoid valve
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-139
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
SAT974H
SAT385J
SAT021J
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0048S01
CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I
Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).
3) Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “3” after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34
MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-143.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to following step.
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “4” when depressing accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
I
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting referring to the table below.)
Vehicle condition
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4
No malfunction exists
Malfunction for P0734 exists.
1 , 2 , 3 , 4
1 , 2 , 2 , 1
AT-140
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 45 to 55km/h (28 to 34PH) under the following condition and release the accelerator pedal completely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 45 to 55 km/h (28 to 34 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-141
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH
NAAT0193
AT-142
MAT760A
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0049
1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
During “Cruise test Part 1”, AT-71.
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
GI
MA
EM
LC
Yes or No
EC
SAT988H
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
©
GO TO 9.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-62.
OK
NG
© GO TO 3.
©
GO TO 6.
OK or NG
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-143
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK SOLENOID VALVES
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.
SAT158J
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
4 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK
NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
Repair control valve.
OK or NG
AT-144
SAT367H
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
5 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 9.
©
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
GI
MA
EM
6 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 7.
©
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
TF
PD
AX
SAT158J
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-145
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
I Pressure regulator valve
I Pilot valve
I Pressure modifier valve
SAT367H
OK
NG
©
GO TO 8.
©
Repair control valve.
OK or NG
8 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 9.
© Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
9 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-140.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
AT-146
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
SOLENOID VALVES
I
NAAT0050
NAAT0050S01
Resistance Check
NAAT0050S0101
I
Check resistance between terminals (3, 2 or 6) and ground.
Resistance (Approx.) Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Line pressure solenoid valve
2
6
3
Terminal No.
Ground
20 - 40 Ω
2.5 - 5 Ω
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT159J
Operation Check
NAAT0050S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2 or 6) and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SAT158J
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-147
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAAT0051
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the gear in “D
4
”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston operation will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid temperature is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT342HA
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0051S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty
Condition
Lock-up “OFF”
"
Lock-up “ON”
Specification
Approximately 4%
"
Approximately 94%
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Condition
When A/T performs lock-up.
NAAT0051S03
Judgement standard
8 - 15V
3 G/OR
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
When A/T does not perform lock-up.
1V or less
Diagnostic trouble code
: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
: P0740
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.
NAAT0051S04
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
AT-148
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
SEF895K
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0051S01
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT and wait at least 1 second.
With GST
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
SAT911I
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-149
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV
NAAT0194
AT-150
MAT761A
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0052
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT336I
CL
MT
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 10 - 20
Ω
?
©
GO TO 2.
©
1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-152.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
2 CHECK RESISTANCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and TCM harness connector terminal 3.
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 0
Ω
?
© GO TO 3.
© Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SAT538J
SC
EL
IDX
AT-151
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-149.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
SAT160J
Component Inspection
NAAT0053
TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
NAAT0053S01
I
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.
Terminal No.
NAAT0053S0101
Resistance (Approx.) Solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
7 Ground 10 - 20 Ω
Operation Check
NAAT0053S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground.
SAT161J
AT-152
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description
Description
NAAT0054
I
This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM self-diagnosis.
I
This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indicator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I
This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter clutch, etc.
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0054S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve duty
Condition
Lock-up “OFF”
"
Lock-up “ON”
Specification
Approximately 4%
"
Approximately 94%
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0054S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
1
2
G/Y
BR/Y
Line pressure solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
(with dropping resistor)
Condition
Judgement standard
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
1.5 - 2.5V
0.5V or less
5 - 14V
0.5V or less
TF
PD
AX
SU
When A/T performs lock-up.
8 - 15V
BR
3 G/OR
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
When A/T does not perform lock- up.
1V or less
ST
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
NAAT0054S04
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th) supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck closed.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-153
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description (Cont’d)
Gear position supposed by TCM
In case of gear position with no malfunctions
In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed
*: P0744 is detected.
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
2
Diagnostic trouble code
: A/T TCC S/V FNCTN
: P0744
4
4
1*
Malfunction is detected when ...
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if electrical circuit is good.
Check item (Possible cause)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
SAT974H
SAT385J
SAT021J
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0054S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down the fluid).
3) Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to more than 80 km/h (50 MPH) and maintain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 seconds after “TESTING” shows.)
THROTTLE POSI: 1.0/8 - 2.0/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94%
VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH)
I
Check that “GEAR” shows “4”.
I
For shift schedule, refer to SDS, AT-345.
AT-154
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description (Cont’d)
I
If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-157.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Start vehicle with selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position and throttle opening 1.0/8 - 2.0/8. Check that vehicle runs through gear shift of D
1
,
D
2
,
D
3
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
,
D
4
,
D
4 lock-up, in accordance
with shift schedule. Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Start vehicle with selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position and throttle opening 1.0/8 - 2.0/8. Check that vehicle runs through gear shift of D lock-up, in accordance
,
D
2
,
D
3
,
D
4
,
D
4
with shift schedule. Refer to shift schedule, AT-345.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
RS
BT
HA
SC
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-155
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG
NAAT0195
AT-156
MAT762A
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
During “Cruise test Part 1”, AT-71.
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
Diagnostic Procedure
=NAAT0055
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT988H
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
Yes or No
© I GO TO 10.
I And check for proper lock-up.
© GO TO 2.
2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-62.
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
GO TO 6.
3 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
OK
NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Repair control valve.
OK or NG
RS
BT
SAT367H
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-157
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 5.
©
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
5 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-154.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© I GO TO 10.
I And check for proper lock-up.
6 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-161.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 7.
©
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
AT-158
SAT158J
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
7 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
I Pressure regulator valve
I Pilot valve
I Pressure modifier valve
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
OK
NG
©
GO TO 8.
©
Repair control valve.
OK or NG
8 CHECK SHIFT UP (D
3
TO D
4
)
Does A/T shift from D
3 to D
4 at the specified speed?
Yes
No
Yes or No
© GO TO 9.
© Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
9 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-154.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© I GO TO 10.
I And check for proper lock-up.
10 CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
During “Cruise test Part 1”, AT-71.
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Perform “Cruise test Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
©
GO TO 11.
SAT367H
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
11 CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation.
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 12.
©
Replace solenoid valve assembly.
AT-159
SC
EL
IDX
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
12 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-290.
2. Check control valves for sticking.
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Torque converter clutch relief valve
SAT367H
OK
NG
©
GO TO 13.
©
Repair control valve
OK or NG
13 CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 14.
©
Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
14 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-154.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
AT-160
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
SOLENOID VALVES
I
NAAT0056
NAAT0056S01
Resistance Check
NAAT0056S0101
I
Check resistance between terminals (6 or 7) and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
6
Terminal No.
Ground
7
Resistance (Approx.)
2.5 - 5 Ω
10 - 20 Ω
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT159J
Operation Check
NAAT0056S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminals (6 or 7) and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SAT158J
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-161
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description
Description
NAAT0057
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is
“OFF”.
SAT341H
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0057S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item Condition Specification
Line pressure solenoid valve duty
Small throttle opening (Low line pressure)
"
Large throttle opening (High line pressure)
Approximately 24%
"
Approximately 95%
NOTE:
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0057S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item Condition
Judgement standard
1
2
G/Y
BR/Y
Line pressure solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
(with dropping resistor)
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
When depressing accelerator pedal fully after warming up engine.
1.5 - 2.5V
0.5V or less
5 - 14V
0.5V or less
Diagnostic trouble code
: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
: P0745
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
NAAT0057S04
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
AT-162
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
SEF895K
SAT911I
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0057S01
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.
With GST
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 second.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-163
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV
NAAT0196
AT-164
MAT763A
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0058
GI
MA
EM
LC
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 2.5 - 5
Ω
?
©
GO TO 2.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Line pressure solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-167.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
EC
FE
SAT192IA
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-165
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 2.
Yes
No
SAT539J
©
GO TO 3.
Is resistance approx. 11.2 - 12.8
Ω
?
©
Check the following items:
I Dropping resistor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-167.
I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
AT-166
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Check resistance between terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 1.
GI
MA
FE
CL
Yes
No
MT
Is resistance approx. 0
Ω
?
©
GO TO 4.
©
Repair or replace harness between TCM terminal 1 and terminal cord assembly.
SAT540J
TF
PD
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-163.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AX
SU
BR
ST
EM
LC
EC
RS
SAT657I
BT
Component Inspection
LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
I
NAAT0059
NAAT0059S01
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve 6
Terminal No.
Ground
NAAT0059S0101
Resistance (Approx.)
2.5 - 5
Ω
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-167
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
Operation Check
NAAT0059S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 6 and ground.
SAT658I
DROPPING RESISTOR
I
Check resistance between two terminals.
Resistance: 11.2 - 12.8
Ω
NAAT0059S02
SAT848BD
AT-168
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description
Description
NAAT0060
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT341H
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
EC
FE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
11 L/W
Shift solenoid valve A
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0060S02
Condition
When shift solenoid valve A operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
4
”.)
When shift solenoid valve A does not operate.
(When driving in “D
2
” or “D
3
”.)
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
CL
MT
TF
Diagnostic trouble code
: SFT SOL A/CIRC
: P0750
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0060S03
I Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
I Shift solenoid valve A
SEF895K
SU
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0060S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transmission to shift
“1” , “2” (“GEAR”).
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D
1
,
D
2 position.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT911I
PD
AX
AT-169
Description (Cont’d)
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D
1
,
D
2 position.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
AT-170
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A
NAAT0197
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT764A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-171
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.
NAAT0061
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40
Ω
?
©
GO TO 2.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-173.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 6 and TCM harness connector terminal 11.
SAT330I
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 0
Ω
?
©
GO TO 3.
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SAT541J
AT-172
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-169.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
Component Inspection
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
I
NAAT0062
NAAT0062S01
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve A 3
Terminal No.
Ground
NAAT0062S0101
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40 Ω
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT654I
Operation Check
NAAT0062S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.
TF
PD
AX
SAT653I
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-173
Description
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description
NAAT0063
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM in response to signals sent from the PNP switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then be shifted to the optimum position.
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
SAT341H
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
12 L/R
Shift solenoid valve B
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0063S02
Condition
When shift solenoid valve B operates.
(When driving in “D
1
” or “D
2
”.)
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
When shift solenoid valve B does not operate.
(When driving in “D
3
” or “D
4
”.)
1V or less
Diagnostic trouble code
: SFT SOL B/CIRC
: P0755
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tires to operate the solenoid valve.
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0063S03
I Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
I Shift solenoid valve B
SEF895K
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0063S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Drive vehicle in “D” position and allow the transmission to shift
1 , 2 , 3 (“GEAR”).
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D
1
,
D
2
,
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
D
3 position.
SAT911I
AT-174
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description (Cont’d)
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D
1
,
D
2
,
D
3
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
position.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-175
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B
NAAT0198
AT-176
MAT765A
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0064
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT332I
CL
MT
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40
Ω
?
©
GO TO 2.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-178.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 7 and TCM harness connector terminal 12.
HA
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 0
Ω
?
©
GO TO 3.
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SAT542J
SC
EL
IDX
AT-177
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-174.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Component Inspection
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
I
NAAT0065
NAAT0065S01
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Shift solenoid valve B 2
Terminal No.
Ground
NAAT0065S0101
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40 Ω
SAT651I
Operation Check
NAAT0065S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.
SAT650I
AT-178
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description
Description
NAAT0066
I
Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position and sends a signal to the TCM.
I
Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed throttle position switch. The wide open position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.
SAT329I
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0066S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item
Throttle position sensor
Condition
Fully-closed throttle
Fully-open throttle
Specification
Approximately 0.5V
Approximately 4V
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
MT
NAAT0066S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
16
17
32
OR/W
OR/B
P/B
Closed throttle position switch
(in throttle position switch)
Wide open throttle position switch
(in throttle position switch)
Throttle position sensor
(Power source)
Condition
Judgement standard
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]
When depressing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]
Battery voltage
1V or less
When depressing accelerator pedal more than half-way after warming up engine.
Battery voltage
When releasing accelerator pedal after warming up engine.
1V or less
— 4.5 - 5.5V
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
41 P
Throttle position sensor
When depressing accelerator pedal slowly after warming up engine.
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately
0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately
4V
RS
BT
HA
42 B
Throttle position sensor
(Ground)
— —
SC
EL
IDX
AT-179
Description (Cont’d)
Diagnostic trouble code
: TP SEN/CIRC A/T
: P1705
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
NAAT0066S04
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
I Throttle position sensor
I Throttle position switch
SAT974H
SAT385J
SEF895K
SAT911I
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0066S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
2) Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following.
Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.
Accelerator pedal condition
Fully released
Partially depressed
THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW
Less than 4.7V
0.1 - 4.6V
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Fully depressed
More than
1.9 - 4.6V
OFF ON
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
3) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON”)
AT-180
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description (Cont’d)
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 3 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” (OD “ON”) position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and driving for more than 3 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-181
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS
NAAT0199
AT-182
MAT766A
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0067
1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM
Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Refer to EC-70, “DESCRIPTION”.
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 2.
© Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-183
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately 4V
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
SAT076H
SAT513J
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sensor circuit. (Main harness)
AT-184
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.
4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0011
FE
CL
MT
OK
NG
SU
SAT052I
OK or NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-187.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-185
TF
PD
AX
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
(after warming up engine)
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]
MTBL0206
OK
NG
SAT526J
OK or NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-187.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)
5 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-180.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-186
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAAT0205
THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH
NAAT0205S01
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position)
NAAT0205S0101
I
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
SAT694I
Accelerator pedal condition
Released
Depressed
Continuity
Yes
No
I
To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-99, “Basic
Inspection”.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT343IA
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch
I
Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3.
Accelerator pedal condition
Released
Depressed
Continuity
No
Yes
NAAT0205S0102
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-187
Description
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description
NAAT0068
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in response to signals sent from the inhibitor switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled.
SAT341H
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Condition
NAAT0068S02
Judgement standard
20 L/B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Diagnostic trouble code
: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC
: P1760
When overrun clutch solenoid valve does not operate.
1V or less
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM detects an improper voltage drop when it tries to operate the solenoid valve.
NAAT0068S03
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
SEF895K
SAT911I
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0068S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine.
3) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6MPH) in “D” position (OD “ON”).
4) Release accelerator pedal completely in “D” position (OD
“OFF”).
AT-188
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF” position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “OFF” position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-189
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV
NAAT0200
AT-190
MAT767A
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0069
1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminal 8 and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
SAT334I
CL
MT
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40
Ω
?
©
GO TO 2.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-192.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 8 and TCM harness connector terminal 20.
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Yes
No
Is resistance approx 0
Ω
?
©
GO TO 3.
©
Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
SAT543J
SC
EL
IDX
AT-191
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-188.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Component Inspection
OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
I
NAAT0070
NAAT0070S01
Resistance Check
I
Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Solenoid valve
Overrun clutch solenoid valve 4
Terminal No.
Ground
NAAT0070S0101
Resistance (Approx.)
20 - 40 Ω
SAT392JA
Operation Check
NAAT0070S0102
I
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.
SAT688I
AT-192
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Description
Description
NAAT0172
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature and sends a signal to the TCM.
GI
MA
SAT342HA
MT
SAT021J
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR
MODE
NAAT0172S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Monitor item Condition
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
"
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
Specification
Approximately 1.5V
"
Approximately 0.5V
TF
PD
AX
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
NAAT0172S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
10
19
W/R
W/R
Power source
Power source
Condition
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
Same as No. 10
Judgement standard
Battery voltage
1V or less
SU
BR
ST
RS
When turning ignition switch to “OFF”.
Battery voltage
28 R/Y
Power source
(Memory back-up) or
BT
When turning ignition switch to “ON”.
Battery voltage
HA
42 B
Throttle position sensor
(Ground)
— —
SC
47 R
A/T fluid temperature sensor
When ATF temperature is 20°C (68°F).
When ATF temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Approximately
1.5V
Approximately
0.5V
EL
IDX
AT-193
FE
CL
EM
LC
EC
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Description (Cont’d)
Diagnostic trouble code
: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN
: 8th judgement flicker
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM receives an excessively low or high voltage from the sensor.
NAAT0172S04
Check item (Possible cause)
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
SAT974H
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0172S01
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
SAT385J
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
SAT335HB
AT-194
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS
NAAT0201
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT768A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-195
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0173
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK
NG
SAT514J
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 42 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
I Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to EL section (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).
2 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector on the right side of transfer assembly.
3. Check resistance between terminals 33 and 35 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].
Yes
No
Is resistance approx. 2.5 k
Ω
?
©
GO TO 3.
©
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-198.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
AT-196
SAT191IA
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
→
Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V
→
0.5V
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT076H
MT
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
→
Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V
→
0.5V
TF
PD
AX
OK
NG
SU
SAT518J
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following item:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)
BR
ST
RS
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation Procedure, AT-194.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© I Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
I If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-197
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Component Inspection
Component Inspection
NAAT0174
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NAAT0174S01
I
I
Check resistance between terminals 8 and 9 while changing temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)
20 (68)
80 (176)
Resistance
Approximately 2.5 k Ω
Approximately 0.3 k Ω
SAT687I
AT-198
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Description
Description
NAAT0071
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revolution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT328I
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Terminal
No.
Wire color Item
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Condition
40 W/L
Vehicle speed sensor
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2
MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
NAAT0071S02
Judgement standard
Voltage varies between less than 1V and more than
4.5V
EC
FE
CL
MT
Diagnostic trouble code
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR
: 2nd judgement flicker
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0071S03
TCM does not receive the proper voltage signal from the sensor.
I Harness or connectors
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
I Vehicle speed sensor
TF
PD
AX
SAT974H
SU
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0071S01
CAUTION:
I
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I
If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” again, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least
5 seconds before continuing.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 6
MPH).
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT385J
AT-199
Description (Cont’d)
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position and vehicle speed higher than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
SAT329H
AT-200
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR
NAAT0202
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT769A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-201
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL.
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.
NAAT0072
SAT076H
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.
Yes
No
SAT528J
Does battery voltage vary between less than 1V and more than 4.5V?
© GO TO 2.
©
Check the following items:
I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor
Refer to EL-81, “Component Parts and Harness Connector Location”.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)
2 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-199.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-202
CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Description
Description
NAAT0207
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
GI
MA
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONTROL UNIT (RAM)
: CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
EM
LC
SAT574J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is malfunctioning.
TCM
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0207S01
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT974H
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0207S02
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT.
2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT385J
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-203
CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK DTC
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See previous page.
Yes
No
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM) or CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
©
Replace TCM.
©
INSPECTION END
=NAAT0208
AT-204
Diagnostic trouble code
: CONT UNIT (EEP ROM)
CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Description
Description
NAAT0215
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT574J
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC
Malfunction is detected when ...
TCM memory (EEP ROM) is malfunctioning.
TCM
Check item (Possible cause)
NAAT0215S01
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT974H
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE
NAAT0215S02
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for A/T with CONSULT.
2) Start engine.
3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT385J
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-205
CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
1 CHECK DTC
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch “ON” and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT.
2. Move selector lever to “R” position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch “OFF” position for 10 seconds.
PERFORM DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See previous page.
Yes
No
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)” displayed again?
©
Replace TCM.
©
INSPECTION END
=NAAT0216
AT-206
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC
NAAT0203
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
MAT770A
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-207
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)
AT-208
MAT771A
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
MAT772A
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-209
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
NAAT0073
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds when turning ignition switch to “ON”.
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK
NG
SAT514J
3. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
© GO TO 2.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-96.
I Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to EL-9, “Schematic”.
2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground.
Yes
No
SAT515J
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0
Ω
?
© GO TO 3.
© I Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-96.
AT-210
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)
3 CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
2. Set overdrive control switch to “ON” position.
3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 13 and ground.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
Yes
No
SAT529J
Does battery voltage exist?
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following items.
I Fuse
I O/D OFF indicator lamp
Refer to EL section (“WARNING LAMPS”).
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF indicator lamp (Main harness)
I Refer to EL-9, “Schematic”.
I Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM
FE
CL
MT
TF
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-211
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N”
Position
=NAAT0074
SYMPTOM:
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P” or “N” position.
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in “P”Engine can be started with selector lever in “D”, “2”, “1” or “R” position.
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-99.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH INSPECTION
Check for short or open of PNP switch 2-pin connector. Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-104.
SAT367J
SAT838BB
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Repair or replace PNP switch.
3 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM
Check starting system. Refer to SC-6, “System Description”.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-212
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed
3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or
Backward When Pushed
=NAAT0075
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with selector lever in “P” position.
1 CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
Check parking components.
Refer to “Parking Pawl Components”, AT-326.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT133B
MT
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-213
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves
=NAAT0076
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting “N” position.
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-99.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE
Check control linkage. Refer to AT-265.
SAT367J
SAT032G
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-265.
AT-214
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
4. In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves (Cont’d)
3 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
GI
MA
OK
NG
© GO TO 4.
© Refill ATF.
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
EM
LC
EC
SAT638A
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT171B
SU
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 5.
© 1. Disassemble A/T.
2. Check the following items:
I Forward clutch assembly
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Reverse clutch assembly
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-215
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position
5. Large Shock. “N”
→
“R” Position
SYMPTOM:
=NAAT0077
There is large shock when changing from “N” to “R” position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor circuit?
Yes
No
SAT345HA
Yes or No
©
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0710, DTC P0745 or DTC P1705”, AT-108, 165
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
SAT329I
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
AT-216
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
5. Large Shock. “N” → “R” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
GI
MA
EM
LC
OK
NG
EC
SAT494G
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
FE
CL
MT
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-217
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R”
Position
=NAAT0078
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting “R” position.
1 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
SAT638A
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Refill ATF.
2 CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “1” and “R” positions.
OK
OK in “1” position, NG in
“R” position
NG in both “1” and “R” positions
SAT493G
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
I Torque converter
I Reverse clutch assembly
I High clutch assembly
© GO TO 6.
AT-218
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
GI
MA
EM
LC
OK
NG
EC
SAT494G
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
FE
CL
MT
TF
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
PD
AX
SU
BR
SAT171B
ST
OK or NG
OK
NG
© GO TO 5.
© GO TO 6.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-219
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position (Cont’d)
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
I Torque converter
I Reverse clutch assembly
I High clutch assembly
I Low & reverse brake assembly
I Low one-way clutch
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-220
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2”
Or “1” Position
=NAAT0079
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting “D”, “2” or “1” position.
1 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
SAT638A
MT
OK
NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Refill ATF.
2 CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in “D” position.
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
GO TO 6.
OK or NG
SU
BR
SAT493G
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-221
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)
3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in “R” position.
Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.
OK
NG
SAT494G
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
NG
© GO TO 5.
© GO TO 6.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-222
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position (Cont’d)
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
I Forward clutch assembly
I Forward one-way clutch
I Low one-way clutch
I Low & reverse brake assembly
I Torque converter
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-223
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
SYMPTOM:
=NAAT0080
Vehicle cannot be started from D
1 on Cruise test — Part 1.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” OK?
Yes
No
Yes or No
© GO TO 2.
©
Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-218.
2 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
Yes
No
SAT934FB
Yes or No
©
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, DTC P0750, DTC P0755 or VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR. MTR”, AT-113, 172, 177 or 202.
©
GO TO 3.
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
SAT329I
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
© Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
AT-224
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
(Cont’d)
4 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in “D” position.
Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.
GI
MA
OK
NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
GO TO 8.
5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
EM
LC
EC
SAT494G
FE
CL
MT
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
GO TO 8.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 7.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
TF
PD
AX
SAT171B
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-225
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
(Cont’d)
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Forward clutch assembly
I Forward one-way clutch
I Low one-way clutch
I High clutch assembly
I Torque converter
I Oil pump assembly
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 7.
© Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-226
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
1
→ D
2
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
Kickdown: D
SYMPTOM:
4
→
D
2
1
→
D
2
Or Does Not
→ D
2
=NAAT0081
A/T does not shift from D
1
A/T does not shift from D
4 to D to D
2
2 at the specified speed.
when depressing accelerator pedal fully at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
” OK?
Yes
No
Yes or No
© GO TO 2.
© Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle
Cannot Be Started From D
1
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
CL
MT
TF
PD
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
©
GO TO 3.
3 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT
Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720 and
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR”, AT-113, 202.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuits.
SAT367J
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-227
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
1
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
→ D
2
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
→ D
2
(Cont’d)
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
GO TO 8.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 7.
© Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-228
SAT329I
SAT171B
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
1
→ D
2
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
→ D
2
(Cont’d)
7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Servo piston assembly
I Brake band
I Oil pump assembly
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 7.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
RS
BT
HA
SC
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-229
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
2
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
→ D
3
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
SYMPTOM:
2
→
D
3
A/T does not shift from D
2 to D
3 at the specified speed.
=NAAT0082
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
” OK?
Yes
No
Yes or No
© GO TO 2.
©
Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle
Cannot Be Started From D
1
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
©
GO TO 3.
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
SAT367J
SAT329I
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 4.
© Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
AT-230
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
2
→ D
3
(Cont’d)
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT171B
FE
OK or NG
OK
NG
© GO TO 5.
©
GO TO 7.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
6 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-231
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
2
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
→ D
3
(Cont’d)
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Servo piston assembly
I High clutch assembly
I Oil pump assembly
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 6.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-232
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
→ D
4
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
→
D
4
=NAAT0083
SYMPTOM:
I
A/T does not shift from D
3 to D
4
I
A/T must be warm before D
3 to D at the specified speed.
4 shift will occur.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
” OK?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
GO TO 2.
©
Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In “D”, “2” Or “1” Position” and “8. Vehicle
Cannot Be Started From D
1
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
2 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
With CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits?
I Inhibitor switch
I Overdrive control switch
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
I Revolution sensor
I Shift solenoid valve A or B
I Vehicle speed sensor
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
TF
PD
AX
SAT363HA
Yes or No
©
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705, P0710, P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL
SPEED SEN·MTR”, AT-102, 108, 113, 172, 177 or 202.
©
GO TO 3.
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-233
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
→ D
4
(Cont’d)
3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
GO TO 7.
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-234
SAT329I
SAT171B
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
→ D
4
(Cont’d)
6 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Servo piston assembly
I Brake band
I Torque converter
I Oil pump assembly
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 6.
© Repair or replace damaged parts.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-235
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
=NAAT0084
Yes
No
SAT346H
Yes or No
©
Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P0740”, AT-151.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
SAT329I
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 3.
©
Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check following items:
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Torque converter relief valve
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 4.
© Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-236
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-237
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
=NAAT0085
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.
1 CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to “DTC P0725”, AT-118.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT347H
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
GO TO 5.
3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-238
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition (Cont’d)
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
GI
MA
EM
LC
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 4.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-239
14. Lock-up Is Not Released
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
14. Lock-up Is Not Released
=NAAT0086
SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
1 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
SAT367J
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P1705”, AT-183.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-240
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
→ D
3
)
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle
(Light Braking D
4
→
D
3
)
=NAAT0087
SYMPTOM:
I
Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T shifts from D
4 to D
3
.
I
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning overdrive control switch OFF.
I
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting
A/T from “D” to “2” position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P1760”, AT-191.
©
GO TO 2.
2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC-181, “Description”.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
© Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
SAT348H
SU
BR
ST
SAT329I
RS
BT
TF
PD
AX
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-241
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
→ D
3
) (Cont’d)
3 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
SAT171B
OK or NG
OK
NG
© GO TO 4.
©
GO TO 6.
4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OK
NG
OK or NG
© GO TO 5.
© Repair or replace damaged parts.
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-262.
2. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Oil pump assembly
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT-242
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D
1
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D
1
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not start from D
1 on Cruise test — Part 2.
NAAT0088
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR”, AT-113, 172, 177 or 202.
©
GO TO 2.
SAT633I
CL
MT
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D
1
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
HA
SC
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-243
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D
4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
→ D
3
, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” → “OFF”
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D
4
→
D
3
, When
Overdrive Control Switch “ON”
→
“OFF”
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D
4 to D control switch to “OFF” position.
3
=NAAT0089
when changing overdrive
1 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-248.
©
Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D
2
,
D
3
SAT344H
AT-244
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
18. A/T Does Not Shift: D
3
→ 2
2
, When Selector Lever “D” → “2” Position
18. A/T Does Not Shift: D
Lever “D”
→
“2” Position
3
→
2
2
, When Selector
=NAAT0090
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D
3 from “D” to “2” position.
to 2
2 when changing selector lever
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT367J
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
©
Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D
Or Does Not Kickdown: D
4
1
,
D
2
,
D
2
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-245
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2
2
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
→ 1
1
, When Selector Lever “2” → “1” Position
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 2
Lever “2”
→
“1” Position
2
→
1
1
, When Selector
=NAAT0091
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 2
2 from “2” to “1” position.
to 1
1 when changing selector lever
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to PNP switch circuit?
Yes
No
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
Yes or No
©
Check PNP switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
©
GO TO 2.
SAT367J
OK
NG
SAT778B
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-246
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine
Brake
SYMPTOM:
NAAT0092
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting from 2
2
(1
2
) to 1
1
.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position” OK?
Yes
No
Yes or No
©
Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D
4
©
Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In “R” Position”, AT-218.
,
D
3
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT516J
SAT341I
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Overdrive Control and Throttle Position
Switches Circuit Checks)
NAAT0204
SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diagnostic procedure even the lamp circuit is good.
DESCRIPTION
NAAT0204S01
I PNP switch
The PNP switch assemble includes a transmission range switch. The transmission range switch detects the selector position and sends a signal to the TCM.
I
Overdrive control switch
Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and sends a signal to the TCM.
I
Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed throttle position switch.
The wide open throttle position switch sends a signal to the
TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully closed.
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT329I
AT-247
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
=NAAT0204S03
NOTE:
The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive control and throttle position switch circuits.
1 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out “P”, “R”, “N”, “D”, “2” and “1” position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector lever position is indicated properly.
OK
NG
SAT761I
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Check the following items:
I PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-253.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
AT-248
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
2 CHECK PNP SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0205
FE
CL
MT
Yes
No
SAT517J
Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?
© GO TO 3.
©
Check the following items:
I PNP switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-253.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and PNP switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between PNP switch and TCM (Main harness)
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-249
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
3 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch “ON” displayed on CONSULT means overdrive “OFF”.)
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 22 and ground when overdrive control switch is “ON” and “OFF”.
Voltage:
Switch position “ON”:
Battery voltage
Switch position “OFF”:
1V or less
SAT076H
SAT531J
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT)
©
GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT)
©
GO TO 5.
NG
©
Check the following items:
I Overdrive control switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-253.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness)
AT-250
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following. Refer to steps 1 and 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.
4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
MTBL0011
FE
CL
MT
OK
NG
SU
SAT052I
OK or NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-254.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-251
TF
PD
AX
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
(after warming up engine)
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, AT-46.]
MTBL0206
OK
NG
SAT526J
OK or NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-254.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)
6 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic procedure, AT-248.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
© 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
AT-252
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Overdrive Control Switch
I
Check continuity between two terminals.
Continuity:
Switch position “ON”:
No
Switch position “OFF”:
Yes
NAAT0204S04
NAAT0204S0401
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT342I
SAT517GB
Park/Neutral Position Switch
NAAT0204S0402
1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between terminals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through each position.
Terminal No.
Lever position
P
R
N
D
2
1
1 - 2
3 - 5
1 - 2
3 - 7
3 - 8
3 - 9
3 - 4
3 - 6
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT843BG
SU
2. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-265.
BR
ST
RS
SAT807B
BT
4. If NG on step 2, remove PNP switch from A/T and check continuity of PNP switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust PNP switch. Refer to AT-265.
6. If NG on step 4, replace PNP switch.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT386HC
AT-253
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
Throttle Position Switch
NAAT0204S0403
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle Position)
I
Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCE-
Accelerator pedal condition
Released
Depressed
Continuity
Yes
No
SAT694I
I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC-99, “Basic
Inspection”.
Wide Open Throttle Position Switch
I
Check continuity between terminals 2 and 3.
Accelerator pedal condition
Released
Depressed
Continuity
No
Yes
SAT343IA
SAT251JA
A/T Fluid Temperature Switch
NAAT0204S0404
1. Make sure the A/T fluid warning lamp lights when the key is inserted and turned to “ON”.
2. Make sure the A/T fluid warning lamp goes off when turning the ignition switch to “ON”.
3. Check resistance between terminal 10 and ground while changing temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F)
140 (284) or more
140 (284) or less
Resistance
Yes
No
AT-254
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description
Description
NAAT0093
I
The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a shift lock:
With the key switch turned to “ON”, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” (parking) to any other position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted from “P” to any other position.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed in “P”.
I
The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key cylinder, respectively.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SU
BR
SAT138JA
ST
RS
BT
TF
PD
AX
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-255
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —
NAAT0094
AT-256
MAT773A
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure
Diagnostic Procedure
NAAT0095
SYMPTOM 1:
I
Selector lever cannot be moved from “P” position with key in “ON” position and brake pedal applied.
I
Selector lever can be moved from “P” position with key in
“ON” position and brake pedal released.
I
Selector lever can be moved from “P” position when key is removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to
“P” position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to any position except “P”.
1 CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 2.
©
Repair key interlock cable. Refer to “Key Interlock Cable”, AT-260.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
2 CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
Check selector lever position for damage.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 3.
©
Check selector lever. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE — Inhibitor Switch and Manual
Control Linkage Adjustment”, AT-265 and AT-265.
TF
PD
3 CHECK POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch harness terminal 1 and ground.
AX
SU
BR
Yes
No
ST
RS
SAT917HJ
Does battery voltage exist?
©
GO TO 4.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between battery and ASCD brake switch harness terminal 1
I Fuse
I Ignition switch (Refer to EL section.)
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-257
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (BRAKE SWITCH)
Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
I Check voltage between A/T device harness terminal 5 and ground.
Voltage:
Brake pedal depressed:
0V
Brake pedal released:
Battery voltage
OK
NG
SAT346IA
OK or NG
©
GO TO 5.
©
Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector 5 and ASCD brake switch harness connector 2
I ASCD brake switch
(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-259.)
5 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 6 and ground.
SAT347I
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 6.
©
Repair harness or connector.
6 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH
(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-259.)
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 7.
©
Replace park position switch.
AT-258
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
7 CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-259.)
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
GO TO 8.
©
Replace shift lock solenoid.
8 CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION
1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch from “OFF” to “ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation.
OK
NG
OK or NG
©
INSPECTION END
©
1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test.
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Component Check
NAAT0096
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
NAAT0096S01
I
Check operation by applying battery voltage between shift lock solenoid harness connector terminal 2 and A/T device harness connector terminal 5.
TF
PD
AX
SAT357IA
SU
PARK POSITION SWITCH
NAAT0096S02
I heck continuity between park position switch harness connector terminal 2 and A/T device harness connector terminal 6.
Continuity Condition
When selector lever is set in “P” position and selector lever button is released
Except above
Yes
No
BR
ST
RS
SAT358I
BT
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
NAAT0096S03
I
Check continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector terminals 1 and 2.
Condition
When brake pedal is depressed
When brake pedal is released
Continuity
No
Yes
HA
SC
EL
Check ASCD brake switch after adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR-14, “Removal and Installation”.
IDX
SAT922HM
AT-259
Components
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
NAAT0097
SAT352I
CAUTION:
I
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adjacent parts.
I
After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Removal
NAAT0098
Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.
SAT353I
AT-260
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Installation
Installation
NAAT0099
1. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install lock plate.
2. Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with band.
3. Set selector lever to P position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT354I
4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT355I
5. Install casing cap to bracket.
6. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod.
SAT356I
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-261
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
REMOVAL
1. Remove exhaust front tube.
2. Remove oil pan and gasket and drain ATF.
NAAT0100
NAAT0100S01
SAT359I
3. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor if necessary.
4. Remove oil strainer.
SAT073BA
5. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts and disconnecting harness connector.
Bolt length and location
Bolt symbol
A
B
mm (in)
33 (1.30)
45 (1.77)
6. Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary.
7. Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary.
SAT353B
8. Remove accumulator
A, B, C
and
D
by applying compressed air if necessary.
I
Hold each piston with rag.
9. Reinstall any part removed.
I
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT074BA
AT-262
SAT360IA
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement
Revolution Sensor Replacement
NAAT0210
— 4WD MODEL —
NAAT0210S01
1. Remove rear engine mounting member from side member while supporting A/T with transfer case with jack. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to
EM-44, “Rear Engine Mounting”.
2. Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible.
3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
I
Always use new sealing parts.
— 2WD MODEL —
I
Remove revolution sensor from A/T.
I
Always use new sealing parts.
NAAT0210S02
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT661I
Rear Oil Seal Replacement
NAAT0211
— 4WD MODEL —
NAAT0211S01
1. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-9, “Removal”.
2. Remove rear oil seal.
I
Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.
3. Install rear oil seal.
I
Apply ATF before installing.
4. Reinstall any part removed.
TF
PD
AX
SAT035E
SAT544J
SAT546J
SU
Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal
Replacement
NAAT0212
— 2WD MODEL —
NAAT0212S01
NOTE:
Replace rear extension assembly as a single unit because it cannot be disassembled.
1. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
2. Remove exhaust mounting and mounting bracket.
3. Disconnect revolution and speedometer sensor harness connector.
4. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
5. Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44,
“Rear Engine Mounting”.
6. Remove rear extension assembly.
a. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.
7. Reinstall any part removed.
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-263
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal Replacement (Cont’d)
I
Always use new sealing parts.
Parking Components Inspection
NAAT0213
— 4WD MODEL —
1. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
NAAT0213S01
2. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF-9, “Removal”.
3. Remove A/T control cable bracket from transmission case.
SAT083J
4. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
5. Remove adapter case from transmission case.
6. Replace parking components if necessary.
7. Reinstall any part removed.
I
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT078B
— 2WD MODEL —
NAAT0213S02
1. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
2. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
3. Remove rear engine mounting member. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44,
“Rear Engine Mounting”.
SAT551J
4. Remove rear extension assembly.
a. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.
5. Replace parking components if necessary.
6. Reinstall any part removed.
I
Always use new sealing parts.
SAT546J
AT-264
SAT081B
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment
Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment
NAAT0104
1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T assembly.
2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in “N” position.
3. Loosen PNP switch fixing bolts.
4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both PNP switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near vertical as possible.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
6. Check continuity of PNP switch. Refer to “Components
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment
NAAT0105
Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. You should be able to feel the detents in each position.
If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is improperly aligned, the linkage needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in “P” position.
2. Loosen lock nuts.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT361I
3. Tighten turn buckle until aligns with inner cable, pulling selector lever toward “R” position side without pushing button.
4. Back off turn buckle 1 turn and tighten lock nuts to the specified torque.
Lock nut:
: 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)
5. Move selector lever from “P” position to “1” position. Make sure that selector lever can move smoothly.
TF
PD
AX
SAT032G
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
AT-265
Removal
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
NAAT0214
SAT362IA
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from the A/T assembly upper side.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
— 4WD MODEL —
NAAT0214S01
1. Remove battery negative terminal.
2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.
5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
7. Remove transfer control linkage from transfer. Refer to TF-9,
“Removal”.
I
Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller shaft.
I
Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil seal.
8. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
9. Disconnect A/T and speedometer sensor harness connectors.
SAT532JA
10. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-10, “Removal and Installation”.
11. Remove gusset and rear plate cover securing engine to A/T assembly.
12. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
I
Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.
SAT800C
AT-266
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal (Cont’d)
13. Support A/T and transfer assembly with a jack.
14. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44, “Rear Engine Mounting”.
15. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
I
Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
I
Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
16. Lower A/T assembly with transfer.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT801C
SAT553J
— 2WD MODEL —
NAAT0214S02
CAUTION:
I
Do not attach lifting cable to or place supporting fixture under companion flange at rear of A/T (shown in the figure at left) when lifting/lowering A/T.
I
Be sure to attach lifting cable to rear engine mounting or dynamic damper location when lifting/lowering A/T.
1. Remove battery negative terminal.
2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly.
5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD-5, “Components”.
7. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
8. Disconnect A/T and speedometer sensor harness connectors.
9. Remove starter motor. Refer to SC-10, “Removal and Installation”.
10. Remove gusset and rear plate cover securing engine to A/T assembly.
11. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
I
Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft.
12. Support A/T assembly with a jack.
13. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM-44, “Rear Engine Mounting”.
14. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
15. Pull A/T assembly backwards.
I
Secure torque converter to prevent it from dropping.
I
Secure A/T assembly to a jack.
16. Lower A/T assembly.
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT544J
BT
Installation
I
Drive plate runout
Maximum allowable runout:
NAAT0107
Refer to EM-54, “FLYWHEEL/DRIVE PLATE RUNOUT”.
If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring gear.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT977H
AT-267
Installation (Cont’d)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
I When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”:
26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more
SAT017B
I Install converter to drive plate.
I
After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft several turns and check to be sure that transmission rotates freely without binding.
SAT006G
SAT553H
I
Tighten bolts securing transmission.
Bolt No.
1
2
3
Gusset to engine
Tightening torque
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)
39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36)
29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)
29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29)
Bolt length “” mm (in)
47.5 (1.870)
58.0 (2.283)
25.0 (0.984)
20.0 (0.787)
I
Reinstall any part removed.
I
Check fluid level in transmission.
I
Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that transmission operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selector lever through “N” to “D”, to “2”, to “1” and to “R” positions.
A slight shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time transmission is shifted.
I
Perform road test. Refer to “ROAD TEST”, AT-63.
SAT638A
AT-268
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
AIR BREATHER HOSE
Installation (Cont’d)
NAAT0107S01
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
SAT572J
AX
SU
BR
HA
SC
SAT573J
EL
IDX
ST
RS
BT
AT-269
Components
OVERHAUL
Components
NAAT0108
AT-270
SAT147JA
OVERHAUL
Components (Cont’d)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
RS
BT
HA
SC
SAT752IB
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-271
Components (Cont’d)
OVERHAUL
AT-272
SAT552J
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT185B
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
Oil Channel
NAAT0109
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
AT-273
OVERHAUL
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings
NAAT0110
AT-274
SAT140J
NAAT0111
DISASSEMBLY
1. Drain ATF through drain plug.
2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while pulling straight out.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT018B
3. Check torque converter one-way clutch.
a. Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race.
b. Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race with suitable wire.
c. Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise with Tool while holding bearing support with wire.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT521G
4. Remove PNP switch from transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SAT021BB
SU
5. Remove oil pan.
I
Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles inside will not move.
BR
ST
RS
SAT754I
BT
6. Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT522G
AT-275
DISASSEMBLY
7. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
I
If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after repair of A/T. Refer to LC-12, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLA-
TION”.
SAT171B
8. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid temperature sensor connectors.
I
Be careful not to damage connector.
SAT024BC
9. Remove oil strainer.
a. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly.
Then remove O-ring from oil strainer.
SAT008B b. Check oil strainer screen for damage.
SAT025B
10. Remove control valve assembly.
a. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords then remove terminal clips.
SAT009B
AT-276
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove bolts A and B, and remove control valve assembly from transmission.
Bolt symbol
A
B
Length mm (in)
33 (1.30)
45 (1.77)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT353B c. Remove solenoid connector.
I
Be careful not to damage connector.
SAT026B d. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
SAT127B
BT
11. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while pushing on stopper.
I
Be careful not to damage cord.
I
Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is damaged.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT128B
AT-277
DISASSEMBLY
12. Remove converter housing from transmission case.
I
Be careful not to scratch converter housing.
SAT999A
13. Remove O-ring from input shaft.
SAT995A
14. Remove oil pump assembly.
a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from transmission case.
SAT027B b. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.
c. Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing.
I
Be careful not to scratch pump housing.
SAT028B d. Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump assembly.
SAT108B
AT-278
DISASSEMBLY
15. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT988A
16. Remove brake band and band strut.
a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from transmission case.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT029B b. Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SAT986A c. Hold brake band in a circular shape with clip.
RS
SAT655
BT
17. Remove front side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun gear) from transmission case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT030B
AT-279
SU
BR
ST
DISASSEMBLY
b. Remove front bearing race from clutch pack.
c. Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack.
SAT113B d. Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case.
SAT031B e. Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier.
f.
Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier.
SAT968A g. Remove rear sun gear from transmission case.
SAT974A
18. Remove rear extension assembly (2WD model only).
a. Remove rear extension assembly.
b. Remove parking gear and needle bearing.
CAUTION:
Insert your hand between rear extension and transmission case. Detach rear extension assembly while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.
c. Remove rear extension gasket.
SAT546J
AT-280
DISASSEMBLY
19. Remove adapter case (4WD model only).
a. Remove adapter case from transmission case.
b. Remove adapter case gasket from transmission case.
SAT755I c. Remove oil seal from adapter case.
I
Be careful not to scratch adapter case.
I
Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.
MT
SAT756I
20. Remove revolution sensor from rear extension or adapter case.
a. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.
TF
PD
AX
SAT556J
21. Remove output shaft and parking gear (4WD model only).
a. Remove rear snap ring from output shaft.
FE
CL
SU
BR
ST
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
SAT960A b. Slowly push output shaft all the way forward.
I
Do not use excessive force.
c. Remove snap ring from output shaft.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT957A
AT-281
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmission case.
e. Remove parking gear from output shaft.
SAT109B f.
Remove needle bearing from transmission case.
SAT033B
22. Remove rear side clutch and gear components.
a. Remove front internal gear.
SAT954A b. Remove bearing race from front internal gear.
SAT110B c. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.
SAT111B
AT-282
DISASSEMBLY
d. Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a set from transmission case.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT951A e. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub.
f.
Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and forward clutch hub.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT148G g. Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub.
TF
PD
AX
SAT036B h. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.
SAT037B
23. Remove band servo and accumulator components.
a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case.
RS
BT
HA
SC
SU
BR
ST
EL
IDX
SAT038B
AT-283
DISASSEMBLY
b. Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes out of transmission case.
I
Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
c. Remove return springs.
SAT039B d. Remove springs from accumulator pistons B, C and D.
e. Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out.
I
Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
Identification of accumulator pistons
Identification of oil holes
A a
B b
C c
D d
SAT040BA f.
Remove O-ring from each piston.
SAT523GA
24. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary.
a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmission case) and remove lock nut from shaft.
SAT041B b. Remove retaining pin from transmission case.
SAT042B
AT-284
DISASSEMBLY
c. While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and parking rod from transmission case.
GI
MA
SAT935A d. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
SAT043B e. Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case.
SAT934A f.
Remove oil seal from transmission case.
SAT044B
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-285
Oil Pump
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump
COMPONENTS
NAAT0112
SAT648AB
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0113
1. Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover.
SAT649A
2. Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes.
I
Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of foreaft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor.
SAT650A
3. While pushing on cam ring remove pivot pin.
I
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SAT651A
AT-286
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4. While holding cam ring and spring lift out cam ring spring.
I
Be careful not to damage oil pump housing.
I
Hold cam ring spring to prevent it from jumping.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT652A
5. Remove cam ring and cam ring spring from oil pump housing.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT653A
6. Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control piston assembly.
TF
PD
AX
SAT654A
7. Remove oil seal from oil pump housing.
I
Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT655A
BT
INSPECTION
NAAT0114
Oil Pump Cover, Rotor, Vanes, Control Piston, Side
Seals, Cam Ring and Friction Ring
I
Check for wear or damage.
NAAT0114S01
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT656A
AT-287
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
SAT657A
Side Clearances
NAAT0114S02
I
Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing and cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston. Measure in at least four places along their circumferences. Maximum measured values should be within specified positions.
I
Before measurement, check that friction rings, O-ring, control piston side seals and cam ring spring are removed.
Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston):
I
If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly except oil pump cover assembly.
Seal Ring Clearance
I
Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
NAAT0114S03
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit:
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I
If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
SAT658A
ASSEMBLY
1. Drive oil seal into oil pump housing.
I
Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface.
NAAT0115
SAT081E
2. Install cam ring in oil pump housing by the following a. Install side seal on control piston.
I
Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes toward control piston.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to side seal.
b. Install control piston on oil pump.
SAT654A c. Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
SAT660A
AT-288
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d) d. Assemble cam ring, cam ring spring and spring seat. Install spring by pushing it against pump housing.
GI
MA
SAT661A e. While pushing on cam ring install pivot pin.
SAT651A
3. Install rotor, vanes and vane rings.
I
Pay attention to direction of rotor.
TF
PD
AX
SAT662A
SU
4. Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover.
a. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assembly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
b. Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern.
BR
ST
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
SAT649A
SAT663A
BT
5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly to a close fit.
I
Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit carefully in each groove.
Small dia. seal ring:
No mark
Large dia. seal ring:
Yellow mark in area shown by arrow
I
Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while installing. It may deform ring.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-289
Control Valve Assembly
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly
COMPONENTS
NAAT0116
AT-290
SAT534J
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0117
1. Remove solenoids.
a. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plate from lower body.
b. Remove O-ring from solenoid.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT194B c. Remove line pressure solenoid valve from upper body.
d. Remove O-ring from solenoid.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT667A e. Remove 3-unit solenoid assembly from upper body.
f.
Remove O-rings from solenoids.
TF
PD
AX
SAT043G
SU
2. Disassemble upper and lower bodies.
a. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts and support plates.
b. Remove lower body, separator plate as a unit from upper body.
I
Be careful not to drop pilot filter, orifice check valve, spring and steel balls.
BR
ST
RS
SAT195B
BT
c. Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate.
d. Remove pilot filter, orifice check valve and orifice check spring.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT670A
AT-291
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
e. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper body. Then remove them from upper body.
SAT671A
INSPECTION
NAAT0118
Lower and Upper Bodies
NAAT0118S01
I
Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower body.
SAT672A
I
Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper body.
I
Be careful not to lose these parts.
SAT673A
I
Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from damage.
I
Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage.
SAT674A
Separator Plate
NAAT0118S02
I
Make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not deformed and oil holes are clean.
SAT675A
AT-292
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
Pilot Filter
NAAT0118S03
I
Check to make sure that filter is not clogged or damaged.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT676A
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve
NAAT0118S04
I
Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
I
Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve
NAAT0118S05
I
Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
I
Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-147.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT149G
3-Unit Solenoid Assembly (Overrun Clutch Solenoid
Valve and Shift Solenoid Valves A and B)
NAAT0118S06
I
Measure resistance of each solenoid. Refer to “Component
TF
PD
AX
SAT095B
SU
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor and Switch
I
Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-109
BR
ST
RS
SAT096BA
BT
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0119
1. Install upper and lower bodies.
a. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their proper positions.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT671A
AT-293
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
b. Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body.
SAT681A c. Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.
SAT682A d. Install lower separator plate on lower body.
e. Install and temporarily tighten support plates, A/T fluid temperature sensor and tube brackets.
SAT197B f.
Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer bolt as a guide.
I
Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.
SAT198B
AT-294
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d) g. Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their proper locations.
Bolt length and location:
Bolt symbol
Bolt length mm (in) a
70 (2.76) b
50 (1.97) c
33 (1.30) d
27 (1.06)
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT199BA
2. Install solenoids.
a. Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plates onto lower body.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT200B b. Attach O-rings and install 3-unit solenoids assembly onto upper body.
c. Attach O-ring and install line pressure solenoid valve onto upper body.
3. Tighten all bolts.
TF
PD
AX
SAT150G
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-295
Control Valve Upper Body
COMPONENTS
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body
NAAT0120
Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-346.
AT-296
SAT142JA
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove valves at parallel pins.
I
Do not use a magnetic hand.
NAAT0121
GI
MA
SAT834A a. Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins.
FE
CL
MT
SAT822A b. Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs and sleeves.
I
Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jumping out.
TF
PD
AX
EM
LC
EC
SAT823A
SU
c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts.
I
If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
I
Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT824A
2. Remove valves at retainer plates.
a. Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT825A
AT-297
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring.
SAT826A c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal parts.
I
If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a soft hammer.
I
Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc.
SAT827A
I
4-2 sequence valve and relay valve are located far back in upper body. If they are hard to remove, carefully push them out using stiff wire.
I
Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of valve with wire.
SAT828A
SAT829A
INSPECTION
NAAT0122
Valve Springs
NAAT0122S01
I
Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation.
Inspection standard:
I
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control Valves
I
Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs.
NAAT0122S02
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0123
1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
I
Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body.
SAT830A
AT-298
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
I Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the valves into proper position.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT831A
Pressure regulator valve
I
If pressure regulator plug is not centered properly, sleeve cannot be inserted into bore in upper body. If this happens, use vinyl tape wrapped screwdriver to center sleeve until it can be inserted.
I
Turn sleeve slightly while installing.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT832A
Accumulator control plug
I
Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in plug.
I
Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install accumulator control valve.
TF
PD
AX
SAT833A
2. Install parallel pins and retainer plates.
SU
BR
ST
SAT834A
I
While pushing plug, install parallel pin.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT823A
AT-299
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
4-2 sequence valve and relay valve
I
Push 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve with wire wrapped in vinyl tape to prevent scratching valve body. Install parallel pins.
SAT835A
I Insert retainer plate while pushing spring.
SAT836A
AT-300
COMPONENTS
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body
Control Valve Lower Body
GI
NAAT0124
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-346.
AT-301
RS
BT
HA
SAT966I
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0125
1. Remove valves at parallel pins.
2. Remove valves at retainer plates.
For removal procedures, refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Control
Valve Upper Body.
SAT838A
SAT829A
INSPECTION
NAAT0126
Valve Springs
NAAT0126S01
I
Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard:
I
Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued.
Control Valves
NAAT0126S02
I
Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for damage.
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0127
I
Install control valves.
For installation procedures, refer to “ASSEMBLY” of Control
SAT838A
AT-302
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch
COMPONENTS
Reverse Clutch
GI
NAAT0128
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT841A
SAT143J
SU
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0129
1. Check operation of reverse clutch.
a. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
I
D-ring might be damaged.
I Oil seal might be damaged.
I
Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
BR
ST
RS
BT
2. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, dish plate and snap ring.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT842A
AT-303
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
3. Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch springs.
I
Do not expand snap ring excessively.
4. Remove spring retainer and return spring.
SAT524G
5. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole until piston is removed.
I
Do not apply compressed air abruptly.
6. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston.
SAT844A
INSPECTION
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
I
Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
NAAT0130
NAAT0130S01
Reverse Clutch Return Springs
NAAT0130S02
I
Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter.
Inspection standard:
SAT829A
SAT845A
Reverse Clutch Drive Plates
I
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
I Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
NAAT0130S03
Standard value: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)
I
If not within wear limit, replace.
Reverse Clutch Dish Plate
I
Check for deformation or damage.
NAAT0130S04
AT-304
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
Reverse Clutch Piston
NAAT0130S05
I
Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized.
I
Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
I
Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to assure that air leaks past ball.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT846A
ASSEMBLY
1. Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
I
Apply ATF to both parts.
NAAT0131
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT847A
2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly.
I
Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.
SAT848A
3. Install return springs and spring retainer.
SAT849A
4. Install snap ring while compressing clutch springs.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
SAT524G
AT-305
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
I
Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.
SAT850A
5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate.
6. Install snap ring.
SAT842A
7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance:
Standard
0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in)
Allowable limit
1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT852A
8. Check operation of reverse clutch.
Refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Reverse Clutch, AT-303.
SAT841A
AT-306
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High Clutch
COMPONENTS
TF
SAT144J
PD
AX
SU
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
NAAT0133
Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as those for reverse clutch, with the following exception:
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT853A
I
Check of high clutch operation
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT854A
AT-307
High Clutch
GI
NAAT0132
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
High Clutch (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
I Removal and installation of return spring
SAT525G
I Inspection of high clutch return springs
Inspection standard:
SAT829A
I
Inspection of high clutch drive plate
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
SAT845A
I
Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring
Specified clearance:
Standard
1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)
Allowable limit
2.8 mm (0.110 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT858A
AT-308
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches
Forward and Overrun Clutches
COMPONENTS
NAAT0134
GI
MA
FE
CL
MT
EM
LC
EC
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
SAT557J
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-309
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
NAAT0135
Forward and overrun clutches are serviced essentially the same way as reverse clutch is serviced. However, note the following exceptions.
I
Check of forward clutch operation
SAT860A
I Check of overrun clutch operation
SAT861A
I
Removal of forward clutch drum
Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by holding snap ring.
SAT865A
I
Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons a) While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply compressed air to oil hole.
SAT862A b) Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch.
SAT863A
AT-310
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
I Removal and installation of return springs
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT526G
I Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs
Inspection standard:
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT829A
I
Inspection of forward clutch drive plates
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
TF
PD
AX
SAT845A
I
Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit
1.80 mm (0.0709 in)
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT845A
BT
I
Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston a) Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly.
I
Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT866A
AT-311
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
I
Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in forward clutch drum.
SAT867A b) Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly.
I
Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston.
SAT868A
I
Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of overrun clutch
Specified clearance:
Standard
1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Allowable limit
2.0 mm (0.079 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT869A
I
Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap ring of forward clutch
Specified clearance:
Standard
0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in)
Allowable limit
1.85 mm (0.0728 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT870A
AT-312
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake
COMPONENTS
Low & Reverse Brake
GI
NAAT0136
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
SAT146JA
PD
AX
SAT872A
SU
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0137
1. Check operation of low and reverse brake.
a. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
I
D-ring might be damaged.
I Oil seal might be damaged.
I
Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
BR
ST
RS
BT
2. Remove snap ring, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and dish plate.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT873A
AT-313
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
3. Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and return spring from transmission case.
4. Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race.
5. Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race.
SAT382I
6. Remove low and reverse brake piston using compressed air.
7. Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston.
SAT876A
INSPECTION
NAAT0138
Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
NAAT0138S01
I
Check for deformation, or damage.
Low and Reverse Brake Return Springs
NAAT0138S02
I
Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length and outside diameter.
Inspection standard:
SAT829A
SAT845A
Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plates
I
Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
I Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate:
Standard value
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
I
If not within wear limit, replace.
AT-314
NAAT0138S03
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
Low One-way Clutch Inner Race
NAAT0138S04
I
Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT877A
I Install a new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race.
I
Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively.
I
Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance.
Inspection standard:
Standard value: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I
If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner race.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT878A
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0139
1. Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race.
I
Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes to rear side.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
TF
PD
AX
SAT112B
2. Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston.
I
Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring.
SU
BR
ST
SAT879A
3. Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly.
I
Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT880A
AT-315
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
4. Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch inner race onto transmission case.
5. Install dish plate, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven plates and retaining plate.
6. Install snap ring on transmission case.
SAT881A
7. Check operation of low and reverse brake clutch piston. Refer
SAT872A
8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.
If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate.
Specified clearance:
Standard
0.8 - 1.1 mm (0.031 - 0.043 in)
Allowable limit
2.3 mm (0.091 in)
Retaining plate:
SAT885A
9. Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring.
I
Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and held by petroleum jelly.
SAT884A
AT-316
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly
COMPONENTS
NAAT0140
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT211GA
EC
FE
CL
MT
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
2. Remove side plate from forward clutch drum.
SAT212G
3. Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum.
4. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
NAAT0141
TF
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
SAT213G
5. Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT891A
AT-317
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
NAAT0142
Forward Clutch Drum
NAAT0142S01
I
Check spline portion for wear or damage.
I
Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle bearing for wear or damage.
SAT892A
Needle Bearing and Low One-way Clutch
I
Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
NAAT0142S02
SAT893A
ASSEMBLY
1. Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum.
2. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.
NAAT0143
SAT214G
3. Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by pushing the roller in evenly.
SAT894A
I
Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
SAT895A
AT-318
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)
4. Install side plate onto forward clutch drum.
5. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT887A
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub
COMPONENTS
NAAT0144
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
SAT896AA
SU
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0145
1. Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub forward.
BR
ST
SAT897A
2. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT898A
AT-319
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
3. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
SAT899A
4. Remove end bearing.
SAT900A
5. Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit from forward clutch hub.
SAT955A
6. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
SAT901A
INSPECTION
NAAT0146
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub
NAAT0146S01
I
Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
I
Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust washer for wear or damage.
I
Check spline for wear or damage.
SAT902A
AT-320
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
Snap Ring and End Bearing
I
Check for deformation or damage.
NAAT0146S02
GI
MA
SAT903A
ASSEMBLY
1. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.
2. Install end bearing.
EM
LC
NAAT0147
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT901A
3. Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub.
I
Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
4. Install end bearing.
5. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.
TF
PD
AX
SAT904A
SU
6. Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
I
Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear internal gear.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT906A
7. Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT907A
AT-321
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
8. After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates clockwise.
SAT905A
Band Servo Piston Assembly
COMPONENTS
NAAT0148
SAT908AC
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0149
1. Block one oil hole in OD servo piston retainer and the center hole in OD band servo piston.
2. Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to remove OD band servo piston from retainer.
3. Remove D-ring from OD band servo piston.
SAT909A
4. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston retainer by pushing it forward.
SAT910A
AT-322
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
5. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT911A
6. Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem from band servo piston.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT912A
7. Remove E-ring from band servo piston.
TF
PD
AX
SAT913A
SU
8. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston.
9. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.
BR
ST
RS
SAT914A
BT
INSPECTION
NAAT0150
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem
NAAT0150S01
I
Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT915A
AT-323
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
Return Springs
NAAT0150S02
I
Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and outer diameter.
Inspection standard:
SAT916AA
ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer.
I
Apply ATF to O-rings.
I
Pay attention to position of each O-ring.
NAAT0151
SAT917A
2. Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston.
SAT918A
3. Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer.
SAT919A
4. Install D-rings onto band servo piston.
I
Apply ATF to D-rings.
SAT920A
AT-324
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
5. Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston stem onto band servo piston.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT912A
6. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT921A
7. Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward.
TF
PD
AX
SAT922A
8. Install D-ring on OD band servo piston.
I
Apply ATF to D-ring.
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT923A
BT
9. Install OD band servo piston onto servo piston retainer by pushing it inward.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT924A
AT-325
Parking Pawl Components
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Parking Pawl Components
COMPONENTS
NAAT0152
SAT558J
DISASSEMBLY
NAAT0153
1. Slide return spring to the front of adapter case flange.
2. Remove return spring, parking pawl spacer and parking pawl from adapter case.
3. Remove parking pawl shaft from adapter case.
SAT226H
4. Remove parking actuator support from adapter case.
SAT228H
AT-326
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Parking Pawl Components (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Parking Pawl and Parking Actuator Support
I
Check contact surface of parking rod for wear.
NAAT0209
NAAT0209S01
Rear Extension Assembly (2WD model only)
NAAT0209S02
I
Check for free play between companion flange and output shaft.
I
Make sure bearings roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear.
I
Check contact surface of output shaft for wear.
SAT998G
ASSEMBLY
NAAT0154
1. Install parking actuator support onto adapter case.
2. Insert parking pawl shaft into adapter case.
3. Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto parking pawl shaft.
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT229H
4. Bend return spring upward and install it onto adapter case.
SAT226H
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
AT-327
Assembly (1)
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)
NAAT0155
1. Install manual shaft components.
a. Install oil seal onto manual shaft.
I
Apply ATF to oil seal.
I
Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape.
b. Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission case.
c. Remove masking tape.
SAT931A d. Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case.
SAT932A e. Align groove in shaft with retaining pin hole, then retaining pin into position as shown in figure at left.
SAT933A f.
Install detent spring and spacer.
g. While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto manual shaft.
SAT901E h. Install lock nuts onto manual shaft.
SAT936A
AT-328
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
2. Install accumulator piston.
a. Install O-rings onto accumulator piston.
I
Apply ATF to O-rings.
Accumulator piston O-rings
GI
Accumulator
Small diameter end
Large diameter end
A
29 (1.14)
45 (1.77)
B
32 (1.26)
50 (1.97)
C
45 (1.77)
50 (1.97)
MA
Unit: mm (in)
D
29 (1.14)
45 (1.77)
EM
LC
SAT523GA b. Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case.
Free length of return spring:
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT938A c. Install accumulator pistons A, B, C and D.
I
Apply ATF to transmission case.
SAT939AA
3. Install band servo piston.
a. Install return springs onto servo piston.
SU
BR
ST
TF
PD
AX
RS
SAT941A
BT
b. Install band servo piston onto transmission case.
I
Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmission case.
c. Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT942A
AT-329
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
d. Install band servo retainer onto transmission case.
SAT940A
4. Install rear side clutch and gear components.
a. Place transmission case in vertical position.
SAT943A b. Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly. Then slowly rotate it clockwise until its hub passes fully over clutch inner race inside transmission case.
SAT944A c. Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch assembly is correct.
SAT945A d. Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
I
Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in overrun clutch hub.
SAT946A
AT-330
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d) e. Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly.
GI
MA
SAT947A f.
Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
FE
CL
MT
SAT948A g. Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding forward clutch hub.
TF
EM
LC
EC
SAT949A h. Place transmission case into horizontal position.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT527G
BT
i.
Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch hub as a unit onto transmission case.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT951A
AT-331
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
j.
Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
SAT952A k. Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race.
I
Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front internal gear.
SAT953A l.
Install front internal gear on transmission case.
SAT954A
5. Install rear extension assembly on transmission case (2WD model only).
a. Install revolution sensor on rear extension.
b. Install rear extension gasket on transmission case.
c. Install parking rod on transmission case.
d. Install parking gear and needle bearing.
I
Insert rear extension assembly into place while holding parking gear and needle bearing by hand.
SAT546J
6. Install output shaft and parking gear (4WD model only).
a. Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly lifting front internal gear.
I
Do not force output shaft against front of transmission case.
SAT216B
AT-332
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d) b. Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case.
Install snap ring on front of output shaft.
I
Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear direction.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT957A c. Install needle bearing on transmission case.
I
Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to rear.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT217B d. Install parking gear on transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SAT218B
SU
e. Install snap ring on rear of output shaft.
I
Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in forward direction.
BR
ST
SAT960A
7. Install adapter case (4WD model only).
a. Install oil seal on adapter case.
I
Apply ATF to oil seal.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT759I
AT-333
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
b. Install O-ring on revolution sensor.
I
Apply ATF to O-ring.
c. Install revolution sensor on adapter case.
SAT757I d. Install adapter case gasket on transmission case.
SAT963A e. Install parking rod on transmission case.
SAT964A f.
Install adapter case on transmission case.
SAT755I
8. Install front side clutch and gear components.
a. Install rear sun gear on transmission case.
I
Pay attention to its direction.
SAT974A
AT-334
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d) b. Make sure needle bearing is on front of front planetary carrier.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
c. Make sure needle bearing is on rear of front planetary carrier.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing.
I
Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to front.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT967A d. While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front planetary carrier on forward clutch drum.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT969A
I
Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward clutch assembly.
TF
PD
AX
SAT970A
SU
e. Make sure bearing races are on front and rear of clutch pack.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.
I
Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in clutch pack.
BR
ST
SAT971A f.
Install clutch pack into transmission case.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT973A
AT-335
Adjustment
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment
=NAAT0156
When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end play or reverse clutch end play must be adjusted.
Part name
Transmission case
Low one-way clutch inner race
Overrun clutch hub
Rear internal gear
Rear planetary carrier
Rear sun gear
Front planetary carrier
Front sun gear
High clutch hub
High clutch drum
Oil pump cover
Reverse clutch drum
Total end play
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
—
Reverse clutch end play
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Adjust total end play.
Total end play “T
1
”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
SAT975A a. With needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge),
J34291-2 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylinder in place with set screw.
SAT976A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.
SAT977A
AT-336
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (Cont’d) c. Install original bearing race inside reverse clutch drum. Place shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging plunger to rest on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT978A d. Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement should give exact total end play.
Total end play “T
1
”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
I
If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary.
Available oil pump cover bearing race:
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT979A
2. Adjust reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum end play “T
2
”:
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
TF
PD
AX
SAT980A
SU
a. Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface of reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw.
BR
ST
RS
BT
SAT981A b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT982AA
AT-337
Adjustment (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
c. Install original thrust washer on oil pump. Place shim setting gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Allow gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place with set screw.
SAT983A d. Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger and gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum end play “T
2
”:
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
I
If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thickness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary.
Available oil pump thrust washer:
SAT984A
Assembly (2)
1. Install brake band and band strut.
a. Install band strut on brake band.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to band strut.
NAAT0157
SAT985A b. Place brake band on periphery of reverse clutch drum, and insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem.
SAT986A c. Install anchor end bolt on transmission case. Then, tighten anchor end bolt just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch pack) will not tilt forward.
SAT987A
AT-338
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
2. Install input shaft on transmission case.
I
Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side is front.
3. Install gasket on transmission case.
GI
MA
SAT988A
4. Install oil pump assembly.
a. Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing.
b. Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
FE
CL
MT
SAT989A c. Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit.
TF
EM
LC
EC
SAT990A d. Install O-ring on oil pump assembly.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
SAT991A
BT
e. Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case and oil pump assembly.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT992A
AT-339
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
f.
Install oil pump assembly.
I
Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes in oil pump assembly as guides.
SAT993A
I
Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in transmission, as shown at left.
SAT994A
5. Install O-ring on input shaft.
I
Apply ATF to O-rings.
SAT114B
6. Install converter housing.
a. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine anaerobic liquid gasket, Three Bond TB1215, Locktite Part No. 51813 or equivalent) to outer periphery of bolt holes in converter housing.
I
Do not apply too much sealant.
SAT397C b. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine anaerobic liquid gasket, Three Bond TB1215, Locktite Part No. 51813 or equivalent) to seating surfaces of bolts that secure front of converter housing.
c. Install converter housing on transmission case.
SAT158G
AT-340
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
7. Adjust brake band.
a. Tighten anchor end bolt to specified torque.
Anchor end bolt:
: 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
b. Back off anchor end bolt two and a half turns.
GI
MA
EM
LC
SAT001B c. While holding anchor end bolt, tighten lock nut.
EC
FE
CL
MT
SAT002B
8. Install terminal cord assembly.
a. Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
b. Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal cord assembly on transmission case.
TF
PD
AX
SAT115B
9. Install control valve assembly.
a. Install accumulator piston return springs B, C and D.
Free length of return springs:
SU
BR
ST
SAT004BA b. Install manual valve on control valve.
I
Apply ATF to manual valve.
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT005B
AT-341
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
c. Place control valve assembly on transmission case. Connect solenoid connector for upper body.
d. Install connector clip.
SAT006B e. Install control valve assembly on transmission case.
f.
Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B.
I
Check that terminal assembly does not catch.
Bolt symbol
A
B
mm (in)
33 (1.30)
45 (1.77)
SAT353B g. Install O-ring on oil strainer.
I
Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
h. Install oil strainer on control valve.
SAT221B i.
Securely fasten terminal harness with clips.
SAT009B
AT-342
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d) j.
Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid temperature sensor connectors.
GI
MA
SAT010B
10. Install oil pan.
a. Attach a magnet to oil pan.
FE
CL
MT
SAT011B b. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.
c. Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case.
I
Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
I
Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil from mating surface and thread holes.
I
Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of gasket.
d. Tighten drain plug.
TF
PD
AX
SAT365I
11. Install PNP switch.
a. Check that manual shaft is in “1” position.
b. Temporarily install PNP switch on manual shaft.
c. Move manual shaft to “N”.
SU
BR
ST
EM
LC
EC
RS
SAT299I
BT
d. Tighten bolts while inserting 4.0 mm (0.157 in) dia. pin vertically into locating holes in PNP switch and manual shaft.
HA
SC
EL
IDX
SAT014B
AT-343
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
ASSEMBLY
12. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter.
I
Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid are required for a new torque converter.
I
When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount of fluid as was drained.
SAT428DA b. Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump.
SAT016B c. Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper position.
Distance “A”:
26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more
SAT017B
AT-344
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
Applied model
Automatic transmission model
Transmission model code number
Stall torque ratio
Transmission gear ratio
Recommended fluid
1st
2nd
Top
OD
Reverse
General Specifications
NAAT0160
VG33E engine
2WD 4WD
RE4R01A
4EX08 43X73
2.0 : 1
2.785
1.545
1.000
0.694
2.272
Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (Canada)*1
8.1 (8-5/8 US qt, 7-1/8 Imp qt) 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt) Fluid capacity
*1: Refer to MA-13, “Fluids and Lubricants”.
Shift Schedule
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION
NAAT0178
NAAT0178S01
Throttle position
Full throttle
Half throttle
D
1
,
D
2
48 - 52
(30 - 32)
35 - 39
(22 - 24)
D
2
,
D
3
93 - 101
(58 - 63)
69 - 75
(43 - 47)
D
3
,
D
4
148 - 158
(92 - 98)
134 - 142
(83 - 88)
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
D
4
,
D
3
143 - 153
(89 - 95)
59 - 67
(37 - 42)
D
3
,
D
2
88 - 96
(55 - 60)
32 - 38
(20 - 24)
D
2
,
D
1
43 - 47
(27 - 29)
10 - 14
(6 - 9)
1
2
,
1
1
44 - 48
(27 - 30)
44 - 48
(27 - 30)
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
PD
AX
VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP
4WD (Final gear ratio: 4.363) and 4WD (Final gear ratio: 4.636)
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Throttle position
Overdrive control switch [Shift position]
Lock-up “ON”
149 - 157 (93 - 98)
Lock-up “OFF”
144 - 152 (89 - 94)
Full throttle
Half throttle
ON [D
4
]
OFF [D
3
]
ON [D
4
]
OFF [D
3
]
74 - 82 (46 - 51)
141 - 149 (88 - 93)
74 - 82 (46 - 51)
71 - 79 (44 - 49)
85 - 93 (53 - 58)
71 - 79 (44 - 49)
NAAT0178S02
SU
BR
ST
RS
Stall Revolution
NAAT0163
Stall revolution rpm 2,440 - 2,640
BT
Engine speed rpm
Idle
Stall
Line Pressure
Line pressure kPa (kg/cm 2 , psi)
D, 2 and 1 positions
422 - 461 (4.3 - 4.7, 61 - 67)
1,020 - 1,098 (10.4 - 11.2, 148 - 159)
R position
667 - 706 (6.8 - 7.2, 97 - 102)
1,422 - 1,500 (14.5 - 15.3, 206 - 218)
NAAT0164
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-345
Return Springs
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Return Springs
Parts
Control valve
Reverse clutch
Upper body
Lower body
Torque converter relief valve spring
Pressure regulator valve spring
Pressure modifier valve spring
Accumulator control valve spring
Shuttle shift valve D spring
4-2 sequence valve spring
Shift valve B spring
4-2 relay valve spring
Shift valve A spring
Overrun clutch control valve spring
Overrun clutch reducing valve spring
Shuttle shift valve S spring
Pilot valve spring
Torque converter clutch control valve spring
Modifier accumulator valve spring
1st reducing valve spring
3-2 timing valve spring
Servo charger valve spring
16 pcs
High clutch
Forward clutch (Overrun clutch)
Low & reverse brake
10 pcs
20 pcs
18 pcs
Band servo
Accumulator
Spring A
Spring B
Spring C
Accumulator A
Accumulator B
Accumulator C
Accumulator D
Part No.*
31742-41X23
31742-41X24
31742-41X19
—
31762-41X01
31756-41X00
31762-41X01
31756-41X00
31762-41X01
31762-41X03
31742-41X20
31762-41X04
31742-41X13
31742-41X22
31742-27X70
31756-41X05
31742-41X06
31742-41X06
31521-41X02
(Assembly)
31521-41X03
(Assembly)
31521-41X00
(Assembly)
31655-41X00
(Assembly)
31605-41X05
31605-41X00
31605-41X01
31605-41X02
31605-41X10
31605-41X09
31605-41X06
Item
Free length
38.0 (1.496)
44.02 (1.7331)
31.95 (1.2579)
—
25.0 (0.984)
29.1 (1.146)
25.0 (0.984)
29.1 (1.146)
25.0 (0.984)
23.6 (0.929)
32.5 (1.280)
51.0 (2.008)
25.7 (1.012)
18.5 (0.728)
31.4 (1.236)
25.4 (1.000)
23.0 (0.906)
23.0 (0.906)
19.7 (0.7756)
24.2 (0.9528)
35.77 (1.4083)
22.3 (0.878)
45.6 (1.795)
53.8 (2.118)
29.7 (1.169)
43.0 (1.693)
66.0 (2.598)
45.0 (1.772)
58.4 (2.299)
NAAT0165
Unit: mm (in)
Outer diameter
9.0 (0.354)
14.0 (0.551)
6.8 (0.268)
—
7.0 (0.276)
6.95 (0.2736)
7.0 (0.276)
6.95 (0.2736)
7.0 (0.276)
7.0 (0.276)
7.0 (0.276)
5.65 (0.2224)
9.0 (0.354)
13.0 (0.512)
9.8 (0.386)
6.75 (0.2657)
6.7 (0.264)
6.7 (0.264)
11.6 (0.457)
11.6 (0.457)
9.7 (0.382)
11.2 (0.441)
34.3 (1.350)
40.3 (1.587)
27.6 (1.087)
18.0 (0.709)
20.0 (0.787)
29.3 (1.154)
17.3 (0.681)
AT-346
Accumulator
Small diameter end
Large diameter end
REVERSE CLUTCH
Code number
Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard
Wear limit
Standard
Allowable limit
Accumulator O-ring
A
29 (1.14)
45 (1.77)
Diameter mm (in)
B
32 (1.26)
50 (1.97)
C
45 (1.77)
50 (1.97)
Accumulator O-ring
NAAT0166
GI
D
29 (1.14)
45 (1.77)
MA
EM
Clutches and Brakes
4EX08 43X73
2
2
1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)
Thickness mm (in)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
5.4 (0.213)
5.6 (0.220)
1.80 (0.0709)
0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)
1.2 (0.047)
Part number*
31537-42X02
31537-42X03
31537-42X04
31537-42X05
31537-42X06
NAAT0167
NAAT0167S01
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
TF
HIGH CLUTCH
Code number
Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
Standard
Wear limit
Standard
Allowable limit
4EX08 43X73
5
5
1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)
1.40 (0.0551)
1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)
2.8 (0.110)
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
3.4 (0.134)
3.6 (0.142)
3.8 (0.150)
4.0 (0.157)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
31537-41X71
31537-41X61
31537-41X62
31537-41X63
31537-41X64
31537-41X65
31537-41X66
31537-41X67
NAAT0167S02
PD
AX
SU
BR
ST
RS
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-347
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)
FORWARD CLUTCH
Code number
Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)
Standard
Wear limit
Standard
Allowable limit
Thickness of retaining plate
NAAT0167S03
Thickness mm (in)
8.0 (0.315)
8.1 (0.319)
8.2 (0.323)
8.3 (0.327)
8.4 (0.331)
8.5 (0.335)
8.6 (0.339)
8.7 (0.343)
8.8 (0.346)
8.9 (0.350)
9.0 (0.354)
9.1 (0.358)
9.2 (0.362)
4EX08
6
6
1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)
1.40 (0.0551)
0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295)
1.85 (0.0728)
Part number* Thickness mm (in)
31537-41X00
31537-42X60
31537-41X01
31537-42X61
31537-41X02
31537-42X62
31537-41X03
31537-42X63
31537-41X04
31537-42X64
31537-41X05
31537-42X65
31537-41X06
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
5.2 (0.205)
5.4 (0.213)
5.6 (0.220)
43X73
7
7
Part number*
31537-42X13
31537-42X14
31537-42X15
31537-4AX00
31537-4AX01
31537-4AX02
OVERRUN CLUTCH
Code number
Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
NAAT0167S04
Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
Standard
Wear limit
Standard
Allowable limit
4EX08 43X73
3
5
1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)
Thickness mm (in)
4.2 (0.165)
4.4 (0.173)
4.6 (0.181)
4.8 (0.189)
5.0 (0.197)
1.80 (0.0709)
1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055)
2.0 (0.079)
Part number*
31537-41X80
31537-41X81
31537-41X82
31537-41X83
31537-41X84
AT-348
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE
NAAT0167S05
Code number
Number of drive plates
Number of driven plates
Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Clearance mm (in)
Thickness of retaining plate
Standard
Wear limit
Standard
Allowable limit
4EX08 43X73
7
7
1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)
Thickness mm (in)
6.6 (0.260)
6.8 (0.268)
7.0 (0.276)
7.2 (0.283)
7.4 (0.291)
7.6 (0.299)
7.8 (0.307)
8.0 (0.315)
8.2 (0.323)
8.4 (0.331)
8.6 (0.339)
8.8 (0.346)
9.0 (0.354)
1.40 (0.0551)
0.8 - 1.1 (0.031 - 0.043)
2.3 (0.091)
Part number*
31667-41X17
31667-41X11
31667-41X12
31667-41X13
31667-41X14
31667-41X07
31667-41X08
31667-41X00
31667-41X01
31667-41X02
31667-41X03
31667-41X04
31667-41X05
GI
MA
EM
LC
EC
FE
CL
MT
BRAKE BAND
Anchor end bolt nut tightening torque
Anchor end bolt tightening torque
Number of returning revolution for anchor end bolt
NAAT0167S06
TF
40 - 51 N·m (4.1 - 5.2 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)
4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
2.5
PD
Oil pump clearance
Seal ring clearance
Total end play “T
1
”
Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch
Cam ring — oil pump housing Standard
NAAT0168
Unit: mm (in)
0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009)
Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil pump housing
Standard 0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017)
Standard
Allowable limit
0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)
0.25 (0.0098)
AX
SU
BR
ST
Total End Play
NAAT0169
RS
Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
Thickness mm (in) Part number*
0.8 (0.031)
1.0 (0.039)
1.2 (0.047)
1.4 (0.055)
1.6 (0.063)
1.8 (0.071)
2.0 (0.079)
31435-41X01
31435-41X02
31435-41X03
31435-41X04
31435-41X05
31435-41X06
31435-41X07
BT
HA
SC
EL
IDX
AT-349
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play
Reverse clutch drum end play “T
2
”
Thickness of oil pump thrust washer
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)
Thickness mm (in)
0.9 (0.035)
1.1 (0.043)
1.3 (0.051)
1.5 (0.059)
1.7 (0.067)
1.9 (0.075)
Part number*
31528-21X01
31528-21X02
31528-21X03
31528-21X04
31528-21X05
31528-21X06
NAAT0170
Manual control linkage
Removal and Installation
Number of returning revolutions for lock nut
Lock nut tightening torque
2
4.4 - 5.9 N·m
(0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)
26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more
NAAT0171
Distance between end of converter housing and torque converter
*: Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
Shift Solenoid Valves
NAAT0217
Gear position
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
1
ON (Closed)
ON (Closed)
2
OFF (Open)
ON (Closed)
3
OFF (Open)
OFF (Open)
4
ON (Closed)
OFF (Open)
Solenoid valves
Shift solenoid valve A
Shift solenoid valve B
Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Line pressure solenoid valve
Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Solenoid Valves
Resistance (Approx.) Ω
20 - 40
20 - 40
20 - 40
2.5 - 5
10 - 20
A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
Monitor item Condition Specification
A/T fluid temperature sensor
Cold [20°C (68°F)]
"
Hot [80°C (176°F)]
Approximately 1.5V
"
Approximately 0.5V
Revolution Sensor
Terminal No.
3
6
7
2
4
1
2
1
Terminal No.
2
3
3
Resistance
500 - 650 Ω
No continuity
No continuity
Dropping Resistor
Resistance 11.2 - 12.8
Ω
NAAT0218
NAAT0219
NAAT0220
NAAT0221
AT-350
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 1 Table of Contents
- 4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX
- 4 Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC
- 6 PRECAUTIONS
- 6 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER"
- 6 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine
- 6 Precautions
- 8 Service Notice or Precautions
- 9 Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis
- 10 PREPARATION
- 10 Special Service Tools
- 12 OVERALL SYSTEM
- 12 A/T Electrical Parts Location
- 13 Circuit Diagram
- 14 Cross-sectional View
- 15 Hydraulic Control Circuit
- 16 Shift Mechanism
- 25 Control System
- 26 Control Mechanism
- 31 Control Valve
- 33 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
- 33 Introduction
- 33 OBD-II Function for A/T System
- 33 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II
- 33 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
- 37 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
- 37 CONSULT
- 46 Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT
- 53 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION
- 53 Introduction
- 57 Work Flow
- 59 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION
- 59 A/T Fluid Check
- 59 Stall Test
- 62 Line Pressure Test
- 63 Road Test
- 81 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL DESCRIPTION
- 81 Symptom Chart
- 92 TCM Terminals and Reference Value
- 96 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
- 96 Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN
- 99 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
- 99 Description
- 101 Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW
- 102 Diagnostic Procedure
- 104 Component Inspection
- 105 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
- 105 Description
- 107 Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS
- 108 Diagnostic Procedure
- 109 Component Inspection
- 110 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
- 110 Description
- 112 Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T
- 113 Diagnostic Procedure
- 114 Component Inspection
- 115 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
- 115 Description
- 117 Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS
- 118 Diagnostic Procedure
- 120 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
- 120 Description
- 123 Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST
- 124 Diagnostic Procedure
- 125 Component Inspection
- 126 DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
- 126 Description
- 129 Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND
- 130 Diagnostic Procedure
- 131 Component Inspection
- 132 DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
- 132 Description
- 135 Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD
- 136 Diagnostic Procedure
- 137 Component Inspection
- 138 DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
- 138 Description
- 142 Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH
- 143 Diagnostic Procedure
- 147 Component Inspection
- 148 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
- 148 Description
- 150 Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV
- 151 Diagnostic Procedure
- 152 Component Inspection
- 153 DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
- 153 Description
- 156 Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG
- 157 Diagnostic Procedure
- 161 Component Inspection
- 162 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
- 162 Description
- 164 Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV
- 165 Diagnostic Procedure
- 167 Component Inspection
- 169 DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
- 169 Description
- 171 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A
- 172 Diagnostic Procedure
- 173 Component Inspection
- 174 DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
- 174 Description
- 176 Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B
- 177 Diagnostic Procedure
- 178 Component Inspection
- 179 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
- 179 Description
- 182 Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS
- 183 Diagnostic Procedure
- 187 Component Inspection
- 188 DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
- 188 Description
- 190 Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV
- 191 Diagnostic Procedure
- 192 Component Inspection
- 193 DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE)
- 193 Description
- 195 Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS
- 196 Diagnostic Procedure
- 198 Component Inspection
- 199 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.MTR
- 199 Description
- 201 Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR
- 202 Diagnostic Procedure
- 203 CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
- 203 Description
- 204 Diagnostic Procedure
- 205 CONTROL UNIT (EEP ROM)
- 205 Description
- 206 Diagnostic Procedure
- 207 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
- 207 Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC
- 210 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On
- 212 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In "P" and "N" Position
- 213 3. In "P" Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed
- 214 4. In "N" Position, Vehicle Moves
- 216 5. Large Shock. "N" -> "R" Position
- 218 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In "R" Position
- 221 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In "D", "2" Or "1" Position
- 224 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1
- 227 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 -> D2
- 230 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3
- 233 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4
- 236 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up
- 238 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition
- 240 14. Lock-up Is Not Released
- 241 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 -> D3)
- 243 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1
- 244 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D3, When Overdrive Control Switch "ON" -> "OFF"
- 245 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> 22, When Selector Lever "D" -> "2" Position
- 246 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 -> 11, When Selector Lever "2" -> "1" Position
- 247 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake
- 247 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks)
- 255 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
- 255 Description
- 256 Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -
- 257 Diagnostic Procedure
- 259 Component Check
- 260 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
- 260 Components
- 260 Removal
- 261 Installation
- 262 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
- 262 Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators
- 263 Revolution Sensor Replacement
- 263 Rear Oil Seal Replacement
- 263 Rear Oil Seal and Companion Flange Oil Seal Replacement
- 264 Parking Components Inspection
- 265 Park/Neutral Position Switch Adjustment
- 265 Manual Control Linkage Adjustment
- 266 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
- 266 Removal
- 267 Installation
- 270 OVERHAUL
- 270 Components
- 273 Oil Channel
- 274 Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings
- 275 DISASSEMBLY
- 286 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
- 286 Oil Pump
- 290 Control Valve Assembly
- 296 Control Valve Upper Body
- 301 Control Valve Lower Body
- 303 Reverse Clutch
- 307 High Clutch
- 309 Forward and Overrun Clutches
- 313 Low & Reverse Brake
- 317 Forward Clutch Drum Assembly
- 319 Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub
- 322 Band Servo Piston Assembly
- 326 Parking Pawl Components
- 328 ASSEMBLY
- 328 Assembly (1)
- 336 Adjustment
- 338 Assembly (2)
- 345 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
- 345 General Specifications
- 345 Shift Schedule
- 345 Stall Revolution
- 345 Line Pressure
- 346 Return Springs
- 347 Accumulator O-ring
- 347 Clutches and Brakes
- 349 Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch
- 349 Total End Play
- 350 Reverse Clutch Drum End Play
- 350 Removal and Installation
- 350 Shift Solenoid Valves
- 350 Solenoid Valves
- 350 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor
- 350 Revolution Sensor
- 350 Dropping Resistor